JP6544384B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, when a specific state ( for example, a hit state) is reached, the ball entering means can be changed to a state where the gaming ball can enter the ball , so that the launch strength of the launcher can be adjusted to enter the ball There is known a gaming machine provided with a game characteristic that causes a game ball to be fired to the ball entry means .

JP-A-9-308730

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, a more suitable gaming machine has been required.

Furthermore, it aims at providing the game machine which made the game suitable .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: a launcher capable of launching the gaming ball to the gaming area based on the operation of the player; and the gaming ball can reach a specific area in the gaming area In order to control the launch of the game ball by the launcher based on the operation of the player, the first ball entering means disposed in the specific area and capable of entering the game ball, and The second ball entering means disposed in a specific area and different from the first ball entering means, the third ball entering means disposed in an area different from the specific area, and the third ball entering means Dynamic display execution means capable of executing dynamic display of identification information for a predetermined period based on the fact that a ball has entered the ball, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, to the player A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous; A determination means capable of determining establishment of a specific condition during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the game ball entering the ball means, and the first ball entering means The game ball is changed to a first position where the game ball easily enters the second ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means And the variable member based on the fact that a first predetermined number of gaming balls have entered the second ball entry means when the variable member is varied to the first position. First variable means for changing the second position to the second position, and a second predetermined number of game balls having entered the first ball entry means when the variable member is changed to the second position Second variable means for changing the variable member to the first position on the basis of Termination means for terminating the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the determination that the condition is satisfied, before the elapse of the predetermined period; When it is determined that the first ball entering means enters the first ball entry means during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the specific condition is satisfied, the period corresponds to the period until the specific condition is satisfied. all SANYO which specific effect is executed the indicating that the dynamic display of the identification information is terminated in the course of being, said firing control unit, player amount of rotation of the first operating portion rotatable operation The game ball can reach the specific area based on the fact that the second operation unit different from the first operation unit is pressed and configured to be able to vary the launch strength of the game ball in accordance with the Launch the game ball with a launch intensity that can And are configured to be possible .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the game means is capable of firing the game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and the game ball can be reached to the specific area in the game area. Control means for controlling the firing of the game ball by the shooting means based on the operation of the player, the first ball entry means arranged in the specific area and capable of entering the game ball, and the ball control means disposed in the specific area , The second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the third ball entering means arranged in the area different from the specific area, and the game ball entered the third ball entering means Dynamic display execution means capable of executing dynamic display of identification information for a predetermined period based on the above, and a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information The bonus game executing means for executing the game and the game ball in the first ball entering means A determination means capable of determining establishment of a specific condition during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the ball, and the second ball entering means plays more than the first ball entering means A variable member that can be changed to a first position that facilitates the ball to enter and a second position that facilitates the game ball to enter the first ball entry means more than the second ball entry means When the variable member is changed to the first position, the variable member is moved to the second position based on the fact that a first predetermined number of game balls have entered the second ball entry means. When the first variable means for changing and the variable member are changed to the second position, the variable member is changed based on the second predetermined number of game balls entering the first ball entering means. Second variable means for changing the first position to the first position, and the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means And ending means for ending the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the determined, before the elapse of the predetermined period. The identification information configured in a period corresponding to a period until the specific condition is satisfied, when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, after entering the first ball entering means during the time when the intentional display is made. der what specific effect is executed to indicate that the dynamic display is terminated in the middle of is, the firing control unit, the player said to correspond to the amount of rotation of the first operating portion rotatable operation It is possible to vary the firing strength of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball can reach the specific area based on the second operation unit different from the first operation unit being pressed. It is possible to launch game balls at launch intensity It is Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be made suitable.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged front view which saw through a part of back of a game board in a 1st embodiment from the front side. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a 3rd symbol display in a 1st embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen of the device. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the production | presentation screen of the pressing suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the production | presentation screen of the pressing suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the emission control device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) showed typically the content of RAM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a first collision type selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 6C is a view schematically showing a second random number table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 6D is a view schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table in the first embodiment . (A) is a figure which showed typically the contents of the change pattern table for the 1st special symbols in a 1st embodiment typically, (b) is a change pattern table for a special figure 1 big hit in a 1st embodiment. (C) is a view schematically showing a (normal) variation pattern table for the special figure 1 in the first embodiment, and (d) is a view schematically showing the first embodiment. 1 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for off (probable variation). (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for the 2nd special symbols in a 1st embodiment, (b) is a drawing of a fluctuation pattern table for a special figure 2 big hit in a 1st embodiment. (C) is a figure which showed typically the variation pattern table for special figures 2 small hitting in a 1st embodiment typically, and (d) is a special figure 2 in a 1st embodiment. It is the figure which showed the fluctuation pattern table for deviation typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the presentation change selection table in 1st Embodiment typically. And (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of work RAM of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation in a 1st embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in 1st Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the model which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit command processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the winning a prize production modification processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo production change processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation change process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed change display setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the suggestion production processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment Is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment Is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. It is the flow chart which showed ending command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production change command processing which is done. (A) is a flowchart showing suggestion effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment Is a flowchart showing an error command process. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment It is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a partially expanded front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 4th modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 5th modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 6th modification of a 1st embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 when the game board 13 is viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is an enlarged partial front view of the rear side, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10;

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot or the predetermined reach, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. The touch sensor 51a for pressing and the push button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the pressing force causes the constant firing intensity (a second winning opening 640 (described later)). 2) and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. It is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. In addition, here, even if it is fired with the maximum amount of pivotal movement, the game ball collides with the second prize hole 640 (described in detail) in which the game ball is difficult to win (specifically, the game ball collides with the turning rubber 600a) Launch strength). As a result, even if the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 51, the second winning opening 640 can not be won (winning is difficult), and the second winning opening 640 can be skipped by skipping The switch 51c can be used to facilitate winning by launching the gaming ball. Therefore, the operation of winning to the second winning opening 640 can be another operation, and the player can easily win the second winning opening 640 intentionally. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  When the skip switch 51c of the operation handle 51 is on (when pressed), the ball is fired with a constant strength regardless of the resistance value of the variable resistor described above. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the firing intensity of the gaming ball is varied from the minimum firing intensity of 0% to the maximum by varying the power value (voltage value) supplied to the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 8). It is configured to be variable up to 100% which is the launch intensity. When the skip switch 51c is off (when not pressed), the firing strength is 0% (the game ball is not fired) to 90% (FIG. 2) according to the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 51. It is possible to vary up to the broken line b), and when the skip switch 51c is on (when pressed), 100% (broken line in FIG. 2) regardless of the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. a) can be changed.

  Although the details will be described later, the firing intensity at which the gaming ball is fired when the skip switch 51c is on is the largest of the firing intensities (0 to 90%) which is varied according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The launch intensity (100%, see dashed line a in FIG. 2) is stronger than the launch intensity (90%, see dashed line b in FIG. 2). The 100% firing strength is such that the game ball can reach the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2) described later.

  On the other hand, when the skip switch is off (when not pressed), as described above, the gaming ball is fired at a firing strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. As a result, the gaming ball does not reach the second winning opening 640 (or is difficult) at a firing intensity (0 to 90%) corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. Thus, only when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the gaming ball can be entered into the second winning opening 640 (or it can be entered easily).

  In the present embodiment, by pressing the skip switch 51c, the game ball is fired at a firing intensity (100%) different from the firing intensity (0 to 90%) corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Even if the skip switch 51 c is pressed, the operation range (rotation range) of the operation handle 51 may be expanded (or varied). Good.

  Specifically, when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, the turning operation is performed such that the turning operation amount turns to the right (clockwise) at a position where the predetermined firing strength (90%) is obtained. Regulate. On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the restriction is released, and it is possible to further turn clockwise (clockwise) from the position where the turning operation amount is a predetermined firing intensity (90%). As a result, by pressing the skip switch 51c, it becomes possible to perform the turning operation in the range where the emission intensity becomes 0 to 100%. As a result, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the amount of rotational operation can be increased, and the firing strength capable of firing the game ball can be changed depending on whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. As a result, only when the skip switch 51c is pressed as described above, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, by pressing the skip switch 51c, the emission intensity corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 may be changed. Specifically, two types of variable resistors are provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51, and the firing strength is determined based on the electric resistance of either of the variable resistors depending on whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. It is sufficient to switch the setting. In this case, even if the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51c is the same, the type of variable resistor used is switched according to whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. Therefore, the electrical resistance to be detected is different, that is, the set emission intensity is different. As a result, the firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 can be changed according to whether or not the skip switch 51 c is pressed.

  Thus, for example, when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, the firing intensity based on the operation of the operation handle 51 is the firing intensity (0 to 50%) at which the gaming ball is hit on the left side of the gaming board 13 When the skip switch 51c is pressed, the firing intensity based on the operation of the operation handle 51 is the firing intensity (50 to 100%) at which the game ball is hit on the right side of the game board 13. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily striking the gaming ball between the left side and the right side of the gaming board 13.

  Although the skip switch 51c in the present embodiment is in the on state only while the player is pressing, the invention is not limited thereto, and the on state and the off state are switched every pressing operation by the player. It is good. As a result, when the skip switch 51c is continuously turned on, there is no need to keep pressing the skip switch 51c, so that the operation load of the player can be reduced.

  Although the skip switch 51c is provided on the operation handle 51, the present invention is not limited to this. The skip switch 51c may be disposed at another position, or may be shared with another button (for example, the frame button 22). Furthermore, the skip switch 51c is not limited to a button, and may be another operation means such as a lever. When the frame button 22 and the skip switch 51c are made common, the game ball is fired based on the operation of the frame button 22 only in a specific state (for example, during execution of the pressing suggestion effect). In other states, the game ball may not be fired. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being fired during an effect (so-called button depression effect) that simply indicates that the frame button 22 is pressed for the purpose of improving the interest of the effect.

  Furthermore, although it was constituted so that it could fire by the player's intended firing intensity by changing the firing intensity based on depression of the skip switch 51c, the invention is not limited to the configuration described above, the player can It may be configured to be easy to recognize. For example, when the operation handle 51 is turned rightward (clockwise) and turned in the rightward direction (clockwise) than at a position where the rotation operation amount is a predetermined firing strength (90%) (In other words, when the firing intensity exceeds 90%), the player is notified by lighting the LED, outputting a sound, or displaying a screen. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily recognize that the game is being executed with the launch intensity exceeding the predetermined launch intensity (90%).

  Also, without providing the skip switch 51c, the rotation range of the operation handle 51 is set to a firing intensity of 0% to 100%, and the rotation power necessary for rotation corresponding to the range of 90% to 100% is set high. It may be configured to be stored. By configuring in this manner, the game ball can be fired with a firing strength stronger than 90% by the player intentionally turning the operation handle 51 by increasing the rotational power, and 90 normally By operating the operation handle 51 with a rotation power smaller than the rotation power corresponding to the discharge strength stronger than%, the game ball can be easily discharged with any discharge strength between 0% and 90% ( That is, it is possible to suppress the problem of unintentionally firing the gaming ball with a firing strength of 90% or more).

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The winning opening 64, the first right winning opening 641, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the rotary product 680, the variable display unit 80, etc. The part is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first winning opening 64, the first right winning opening 641, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is being fixed by a wood screw etc. from the front side of 13. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is provided on the center right side of the game board 13. The normal winning opening 67 is formed of a winning opening having a sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball in a gate type. When the game ball passes the normal winning opening 67, the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball having passed to the normal winning opening 67, it is determined whether or not a normal symbol is hit.

  When the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, "o" and "x" After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit display). When the ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37 Is displayed.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the second symbol display device 83 is lighted and displayed as "o", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit. When the symbol which is a hit is displayed, the ordinary electric symbol 641a is operated, and the ordinary electric symbol provided along with the first right winning opening 641 maintained in the state of standing up at the normal time 641a is moved to a substantially V shape (inverted C shape) from a state where it stands up substantially vertically. As a result, the gaming ball is induced by the ordinary electric role piece 641a moved in a substantially V-shape (reverse C shape), and the gaming ball is inserted for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment) in the first right winning opening 641. It becomes easy to ball. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is dislocated, "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is out, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a seven-segment display 37b on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variable display has not been executed among the balls won in the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641, the second winning opening 640, and the normal winning opening 67. A certain holding ball number is shown by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot and the error indication are also indicated by the corresponding lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37 b is configured by two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left side of the seven-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, seven segments) until the fluctuation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 elapses. After the middle segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, the symbol "-" is displayed, which indicates the outset in which one central segment is lighted. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the detachment such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation mode or a dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation patterns can be divided into a relatively long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time, as a reach variation pattern and a non-reach variation pattern. In this way, even if roughly classified according to a certain standard of time (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), the dynamic regarding the time information is also It corresponds to the display mode.

  The time information until the fluctuation start time also corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern time information (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern, etc.) Information on time information determined based on (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed until the start of fluctuation, etc.) also corresponds.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the drawing of the special symbol is performed when the first winning opening 64, the first right winning opening 641, and the second winning opening 640 are hit. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, the jackpot type to be selected corresponding to the set gaming state and the type of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is set.

  In the normal gaming state where the jackpot probability is low and the symbol probability is also set low, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (up to the next time the electric support)), jackpot B (16R hour short jackpot (power support 100 times)) is prepared. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, jackpot E (2R probability variation time non-zero jackpot (without electricity support) (so-called 2R latency probability fluctuation jackpot)), jackpot F (2R normal jackpot (without electricity support)) are prepared There is.

  In addition, in the power support gaming state (probability changing gaming state, time saving gaming state) in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to the high probability with low probability or high probability of the big hit probability, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, The same jackpot type as in the normal gaming state is prepared. As a jackpot type of the second special symbol, "jack C (2R probability variation jackpot (up to the next time electric support))," jack R D (2R time junior high jackpot (power support 100 times)) "is prepared.

  As described above, by setting the jackpot type, in the normal gaming state, although the details will be described later, although the player has become easier to intentionally win the second winning opening 640, bonus when obtained jackpot As it is less than the first special symbol. Specifically, when the big hit with the first special symbol, big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until the power support next time)) or big hit B (16R time short hit big (power support 100 times)) is set, it will be 16 rounds of big hit A game ball of 100 balls can be obtained in one round, and a game ball of 1600 balls can be obtained in 16 rounds. On the other hand, even if it becomes a big hit ("Big hit E (2R probability variation time short hit hit (No power support)" or "Big hit F (2R normal hit (No power support))) in the second special symbol, the two rounds hit And since it is an open time (0.5 seconds for one round) whether or not one ball can win a specific entrance 65a, which will be described later, in one round, it is a big hit that hardly any gaming balls can be obtained It has become. Furthermore, in the first special symbol, after the jackpot game, the game ball will always shift to the power support state where it is easy to win the game ball to the right first prize hole 641. However, in the second special symbol, it will shift to the power support state after the jackpot game. It is not configured.

  This makes it possible to suppress a problem in which the gaming shop side suffers a great deal of damage even when the game ball is made injustice so that the game ball is made to win only in the second winning opening 640. Furthermore, although it will be described later, if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed while the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed for a predetermined number of times or more, an error display (display mode or call A display mode indicating that the gaming method is incorrect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an audible alarm sound or voice indicating an error is also output. Furthermore, an error signal is also output to the external output terminal 261, and notified to the hall computer. As a result, the gaming shop can also determine the illegal gaming method at an early stage, and the damage due to the illegal gaming can be suppressed.

  In addition, not only is it shown whether the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is Indicated.

  Here, "16R probability variation big hit (with electricity support)" is a special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special) after the jackpot of the maximum round number of 16 rounds (1 round is up to 30 seconds or 10 ball wins) It is a big hit that becomes a time-saving state (normal pattern hit probability is high probability) while shifting to a high probability state where the lottery probability of the symbol) is set high. In addition, “16 R time junior high hit” moves to a low probability state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set low after the maximum round number is a big hit of 16 rounds (one round is 30 seconds or 10 ball wins), During a predetermined number of changes (in the present embodiment, the number of changes 100) is a jackpot in which time is short. "2R latent probability variation hit (without electricity support)" is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (1 round is up to 0.5 seconds or 10 ball wins) is there. In this case, unlike the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (up to the next charge)), the short time state (power aid state) is not provided. In addition, “2R normal jackpot (without electricity support)” is a jackpot in which after the jackpot game is shifted to a low probability state, with respect to the 2R latent probability change jackpot (without electricity support) described above. The jackpot of “2R probability variation jackpot (up to the next time electric support)” will shift to the high probability state after the jackpot of maximum round number 2 rounds (1 round up to 0.5 seconds or 10 ball wins), and next time It is a jackpot to shift to the short game state until the jackpot of. The jackpot of "2R regular jackpot (power support 100 times)" comes off with the transition to the low probability state after the jackpot of the maximum round number 2 rounds (1 round up to 0.5 seconds or 10 ball wins) It is the jackpot that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes becomes up to a maximum of 100 times shifts to the short time gaming state.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (certainly under change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is more likely to win the right first winning opening 641 because the probability of hitting a normal symbol to be described later is increased. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hitting probability of the ordinary symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the right first prize hole 641 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is a gaming state (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased) which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction.

  During a definite change (except under the latent change), not only is the probability of hitting the symbol up normally, but also the time and number of times the motorized accessory 641a attached to the first right-hand winning opening 641 is changed. A long time and a large number of opening times are set as compared with the middle. When the motorized part 641a is in the open state (opened state), the ball wins the right first prize outlet 641 as compared with the case where the motorized part 641a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ball is likely to be awarded to the right first winning opening 641 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the electric combination 641a attached to the right first prize winning opening 641 or changing the opening time during a definite change or during a short time, it is per hit. A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized accessory 641a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during a definite change or during a short time, and the electric symbol 641a is opened during the time and one time the electric symbol 641a associated with the first right winning opening 641 is opened. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, the time during which the motorized symbol 641a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized symbol 641a is opened at one time does not occur during definite change or time, and the probability of hitting the symbol normally Only the change may be made to be up relative to the normal. Further, the variation probability may be changed so as not to change the probability of hitting the symbol normally. Specifically, the hit probability is set to 1/1, the fluctuation time is normally set to 5 minutes, etc., and the time is shortened to 0.5 seconds to the first prize hole 641. The game ball may be set to be switchable to a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

  Next, on the lower side of the gaming area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are disposed. By the game ball winning in the general winning opening 63, five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls. A variable display unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B triggered by winning (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, right first winning opening 641 or second winning opening 640. The third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) performing the third symbol variation display while causing the third symbol to change, and the normal symbol variation display with the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 8). For example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) is performed. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device. The details of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol of "o"), the motorized prize 641a attached to the first right winning opening 641 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric combination 641a of the right first winning opening 641 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the right first prize winning opening 641 during definite variation and during time saving.

  It should be noted that the right first prize winning opening 641 can also be changed during or after a certain period of time, such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized symbol 641a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state in which the ball is likely to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for the first special symbol is made (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a first right winning opening 641 in which a ball can win is disposed. When the ball wins the right first winning opening 641, a right first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the right first prize winning opening switch is turned on, the main control device (see FIG. 4) is turned on by the turning on of the first right winning prize winning opening switch as in the case where the first prize winning opening switch is turned on. A lottery of 1 special symbol is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  Here, each of the first winning opening 64 and the right first winning opening 641 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, although the number of winning balls to be paid out when the gaming ball has won in each winning opening is the same, they may be different. For example, even if the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 is three and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the first winning opening 641 is five is configured. Good.

  The right first winning opening 641 is accompanied by an electric combination 641a. The electric role item 641a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric role item 641a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the right first winning opening 641. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electrically operated part 641a is in the open state (enlarged State, and the ball is likely to win the right first prize winning opening 641.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times the motorized accessory 641a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during the definite change and during the short time, the time during which the motorized accessory 641a is opened is also longer than the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the right first prize winning opening 641 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the one on the right first winning opening 641 and the ball is in a state where it is possible to always win. On the other hand, the electric right hand winning opening 641 is provided with the electric role thing 641a, and it is difficult for the electric hand acting thing 641a to be opened at normal times (when not in time), and the game ball is entered into the right first prize opening 641 It is difficult to do it.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the electric combination 641a attached to the first right winning opening 641 is often in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the right first opening 641, so the first opening without the electric combination is Aiming at 64, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and winning in the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery, It is advantageous for the player to aim to be a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 641a attached to the first right winning opening 641 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the first right winning opening 641. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the right first winning hole 641 (so-called "right-handed"), and the through gate 67 is passed to drive the electric part. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a big hit by making 641 a open and obtaining many opportunities for big hit lottery by winning in the right first winning hole 641.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  Next, in the game area above the right side of the game area and above the through gate 67 and the first right winning opening 641, a ball is directed to the right first winning opening 641 and the ball is directed to the right of the variable display device 80. The operation port 670 is disposed at a position where the game ball fired (so-called “right-handed”) to pass through can enter the ball. Although the details will be described with reference to FIG. 3, when the game ball enters the operation port 670, the non-motorized role object 640a provided along with the second winning port 640 is opened (second state (second The game ball can be changed into the state where the game ball can enter the winning opening 640).

  Further, on the upper side of the operation port 670, a rotary part 680 constituted of a rotary body 681 and a case member 682 is disposed. The rotating body 681 is pivotally supported by the case member 682 so as to be rotatable, and the case member 682 having an opening through which one game ball can pass at two upper and lower positions around the outer peripheral position of the rotating body 681 is played It is disposed by screwing to the board. The operating port 670 described above is disposed under the lower opening 682b which is the lower opening of the case member 682 and the gaming ball which has flowed down from the lower opening 682b of the case member 682 is the operating port 670 You will enter the

  The rotating body 681 is formed in a circular outer shape, and is formed in a thickness corresponding to one game ball. There is a recess 681a around the game ball in which one game ball can be inserted, and the rotation motor 681a (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 rotates clockwise for 1 second for 5 seconds. It is always rotated at the rotational speed of Therefore, when the game ball enters the upper opening 682a which is the upper opening of the case member 682 and the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 is located on the upper side (below the upper opening 682a), The game ball enters the recess 681a. Then, when the rotating body 681 is rotated and the recess 681a into which the game ball enters is rotated downward (above the lower opening 682b), the game ball moves from the lower opening 682b to the outside of the case member 682 Flow down and enter the operation port 670 disposed immediately below.

  On the other hand, when the game ball enters the upper opening 682a of the case member 682 and the recess 681a of the rotating body 681 is located at a position other than the upper side, the game ball enters the inside of the case member 682 I can not do it. Here, the gap between the case member 682 and the rotating body 681 is very narrow (1 mm in this embodiment), and a part of the outer shape other than the recess 681 a of the rotating body 681 protrudes from the upper opening 682 a of the case member 682 It is configured as follows. Further, the case member 682 is formed to have a very small thickness (1 mm in this embodiment) with respect to the diameter of the gaming ball. Furthermore, at the right end of the upper opening 682a of the case member 682, a wall portion for the diameter (11 mm) of one game ball is provided in the vertical direction. Thus, when the concave portion 681a of the rotating body 681 is located at a position other than the upper side, the gaming ball that could not enter the inside of the case member 682 is the rotating body 681 from the top of the rotating body 681. Flow down the left side along the outline. Then, it gets over the thickness (1 mm) of the case member 682 provided on the outer periphery of the rotating body 681 and flows down to the lower game area where the through gate 67 and the right first winning opening 641 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, when the nail at the upper part of the through gate 67 is adjusted so that it is difficult to flow down to the through gate 67, the gaming ball is easily flowed down to the rotating object 680. However, the through gate 67 is provided in the lower left gaming area of the rotating character 680, which is a gaming area in which gaming balls that have not entered the inside of the rotating character 680 flow down. Therefore, even if it is adjusted that the game ball does not easily flow down to the through gate 67, the game ball flowing down to the rotating object 680 does not flow down to the through gate 67, and then flows down to the through gate 67. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to make adjustments that make it difficult for the game ball to enter the through gate 67, and it is possible to suppress that adjustments that are disadvantageous for the player are made.

  As described above, in the rotary product 680, only one ball is inserted into the recess 681a of the rotary body 681 every five seconds, and the game ball enters the operation port 670. As a result, the game ball excessively enters the operation opening 670, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the right first winning opening 641 and the specific winning opening 65a provided at the lower position of the operation opening 670. Can be suppressed.

  The rotational speed of the rotary body 681 in the rotary product 680 is not limited to the above-described one, and one ball may be inserted every ten seconds, or one ball every three seconds. The ball may be made possible. Also, the rotational speed of the rotating body 681 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, if the gaming state is not the right-handed gaming state, the rotational speed of the rotating body 681 is decreased (the rotational speed at which one ball can be hit every one minute), and the gaming state is right-handed The rotation speed of the rotating body 681 is increased (the rotation speed at which one ball can be hit every five seconds). Furthermore, if it is not a specific gaming state, control may be performed so that the rotating body 681 is not rotated, or a high rotational speed so that the game ball can not enter the receiving portion 681 a of the rotating body 681 It may be controlled to Thus, if the gaming state is not a specific gaming state (for example, right-handed gaming state), the gaming ball enters the receiving portion 681a of the rotating body 681 and the gaming ball can not enter the operation opening 670. . As a result, even though the gaming state is not a specific gaming state (for example, right-handed gaming state), the game ball is entered into the operation port 670 and the game ball is entered into the second winning hole 640 Cheating can be suppressed.

  Further, both of the rotating body 681 and the case member 682 for restricting the ball into the rotating body 681 may be configured to rotate. Specifically, when both the recess 681 a of the rotating body 681 and the opening of the case member 682 are on the upper side, the gaming ball can enter the recess 681 a of the rotating body 681 and the recess of the rotating body 681 When both the opening 681 a and the opening of the case member 682 are on the lower side, the gaming ball in the recess 681 a can flow down to the operation opening 670. By making the rotational speeds of the rotating body 651 and the case member 682 different, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the timing at which the gaming ball enters the recess 681 a of the rotating body 681. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cheating in which the game ball is intentionally entered into the operation opening 670 and then entered into the second winning opening 640.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotating object 680 is provided to suppress entry of the ball into the operating port 670, but the invention is not limited to this, and other operating items may be provided to the operating port 670. The game ball may be prevented from entering excessively. For example, it is possible to provide a character formed of a tongue-like plate slidingly moving to a position projecting to the upper part of the operation opening 670 and a position to be buried, or distributing the entered gaming ball in the left or right or front / rear direction One of the distribution destinations of the distribution device may be used as the operation port 670. Furthermore, the game ball may switch between a state in which the game ball can easily enter and a state in which the game ball can not easily enter the ball by providing the motorized part in the operation port 670 and operating (variable) the motorized part. In addition, the motorized winning combination may be opened and closed by a lottery result based on passage of the gaming ball to the through gate 67. Furthermore, in order to be able to operate (variable) this motorized part, a fixed interval may be required. Specifically, based on the lottery result executed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role can be operated (variable), and the time necessary for the lottery may be extended. Thus, excessive entry into the operation port 670 can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to control entering the ball to the second winning opening 640 by suppressing entering the ball into the operation opening 670, and by excessively skipping (shortening) the variation based on the first special symbol, It can be suppressed that the euphoria becomes too high.

  A second winning opening 640 is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 and further above the operation opening 670 and the rotating object 680. The second winning opening 640 is a winning opening in which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when the ball wins. As described above, at the position where the second winning opening 640 is provided, the skip switch 51c is used to facilitate winning by firing the game ball. That is, the player can intentionally (intentionally) win the second winning opening 640 intentionally. Therefore, the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning on the second winning opening 640 is made smaller than that of the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. As a result, even when the player intentionally makes a game ball play so that only the second winning opening 640 is made to win, it is possible to suppress a problem that the gaming shop side suffers a great deal of damage.

  Furthermore, while the number of winning balls based on the winning of the second winning opening 640 is one in the present embodiment, there are more than one playing balls for entering the gaming balls into the second winning opening 640. It will be necessary. Specifically, in order to cause the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the operation port 670 and open the non-electric role object 640a, so at least two balls The game ball of is required. As a result, the number of game balls necessary for winning to the second winning opening 640 increases with respect to the winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of the second winning opening 640. Even in the case where an injustice to play a game is made to win a prize, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the gaming shop side suffers a great deal of damage. In addition, it is possible to weaken the motive for performing the illegal game such as making the player play the game ball only in the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the illegal game described above.

  When the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the second special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110 (refer to FIG. 8) due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch, a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. . Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol even while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. And, while the first special symbol is fluctuating, when the result of the fluctuation indication of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a large or small hitting manner, the fluctuation indication of the first special symbol in fluctuation is forced. Stopped (hereinafter referred to as a forced stop). Therefore, since the game ball fired based on the depression of the skip switch 51c enters the second winning opening 640 for executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the player presses the skip switch 51c, (1) It is possible to forcibly stop the variation display of the special symbol in the middle of the variation time, that is, to skip (hereinafter referred to as "skip").

  In the present embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol during the variation when the result of the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a large and small winning manner during the variation of the first special symbol Although the display is configured to be forcibly stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variable display in which the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit is started (or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display), the variable display of the first special symbol in fluctuation is displayed. It may be configured to be forcibly stopped. Thus, the timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped can be advanced, and the player can be more strongly given the impression that the variable display has been skipped.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol during the variation when the result of the variation display of the second special symbol shows the big hit or the small hit during the variation of the first special symbol. Although the display is forcibly stopped and the lottery result based on the forcibly stopped fluctuation is configured to be invalidated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the result of the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a large and small hitting manner during the variation of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol during variation is temporarily stopped, and thereafter After the big hit game or small hit game of the second special symbol is finished, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped may be resumed. Thereby, when the lottery result based on the change of the first special symbol is the lottery result which is advantageous to the player, it is prevented that the lottery result is invalidated and the disadvantage to the player is caused. it can.

  The second winning opening 640 is additionally provided with a non-motor-operated symbol 640a (see FIGS. 3A and 3B). In this non-electric role thing 640a, the game ball can enter the second winning opening 640 in the closed state where the game ball can not enter or is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 3A). In the open state (see FIG. 3 (b)). Specifically, the non-motor-operated role 640 a is disposed at the left end of the second winning opening 640 and is maintained in the upright state (see FIG. 3A), and the lower end of the non-motor-purpose role 640 a. It is mechanically operated (variable) in the open state (FIG. 3 (b)) which is maintained at a position rotated 60 degrees leftward (counterclockwise) around the pivot shaft 640b (see FIG. 3) .

  The non-electric role thing 640a is operated (variable) to the open state by the game ball entering one ball into the operation opening 670, and the game ball enters one ball into the second winning opening 640 and the closed state It is operated (variable).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3, a structure in which the non-motor-actuated part 640 a is operated (variable) based on the ball entering the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 will be described. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view in which the back of the game board 13 in the portion where the operation opening 670 and the second winning opening 640 are arranged is seen through from the front. In FIG. 3 (a), the non-motorized part 640a is shown operated (variable) in the closed state, and in FIG. 3 (b), the non-motor part 640a is operated (variable) in the open state The situation is illustrated. The non-electric role thing 640a is operated (variable) in the open state based on the game ball entering the operation opening 670, and operates in the closed state based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 (Variable).

  As shown in FIG. 3, an opening / closing switching member 902 for opening / closing the non-electric role thing 640a is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and the opening / closing switching member 902 is rotated. The non-motor-operated part 640a is operated (variable) between the closed state and the open state. The open / close switching member 902 is formed in a thin rectangular shape, and a rotation shaft 902 a rotatably supported by a base body disposed on the back side of the open / close switching member 902 (not shown) is formed.

  The open / close switching member 902 enters the first flow passage switching member 900 f rotatably provided in the first discharge flow passage 900 where the gaming ball entered the second winning opening 640 flows down, and enters the operation opening 670 The first flow path switching member 901f rotatably provided in the second discharge flow path 901 where the gaming ball flows down is connected to the second flow path switching member 901f via the first connection member 903 and the second connection member 904, respectively.

  The open / close switching member 902 and the first connecting portion 903 are rotatably fixed at an upper portion (upper side than the rotation shaft 902 a) of the open / close switching member 902 and one end side of the first connecting portion 903. The first connecting portion 903 and the first flow path switching member 903 are rotatably fixed at the other end of the first connecting portion 903 and one end side of the first flow path switching member 900f.

  Here, the first flow path switching member 900 f is formed in a V-shape, and the central portion (rotation shaft 900 f 3) is rotatably fixed in the first discharge flow path 901. The detailed configuration of the first flow path switching member 900f will be described later, but the first connection member 903 slides in the right direction by the rotation switching member 902 rotating in the right direction about the rotation shaft 902a. By being moved, the first flow path switching member 900f is also turned rightward around the rotation shaft 900f3.

  As a result, the first flow passage switching member 900f closes the left first discharge flow passage 900d, and the state shown in FIG. 3A from which the game ball is guided to the right first discharge flow passage is shown. As shown in FIG. 3 (b), the first flow path switching member 900f closes the left first discharge flow path 900d and the right first discharge flow path 900c, so that the gaming ball can be held in the first flow path switching member 900f. It is switched so as to lead to the 2 wall part f2. In the first flow path switching member 900f, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 and collides with the second wall portion 900f2 in the state shown in FIG. 3B, the first flow path switching member 900f It is turned in the left direction by force (self weight) and switched to the state shown in FIG. In this case, the first flow passage switching member 900 f causes the first connection member 903 to slide in the left direction, thereby turning the rotation switching member 902 in the left direction.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 3A, one end of the second connecting member 904 is rotatably connected below the rotation shaft 902a of the rotation switching member 902 as described above. Further, one end of the second flow path switching member 901f (one end of the third wall portion 901f1) is rotatably connected to the other end side of the second connection member 904. In the state shown in FIG. 3A, the second flow path switching member 901f closes the left second discharge flow path 901d and the right second discharge flow path 901c by the first flow path switching member 900f. It is arranged (switched) to guide the gaming ball to the wall 901f2. In this case, when the game ball enters the operation port 670, the game ball entered the fourth wall portion 901f2 collides, and the second flow path switching member 901f is directed leftward by the force (self weight) of the game ball. Counterclockwise), the second connection member 904 is slid leftward, and the rotation switching member 902 is interlocked therewith, and is turned rightward (clockwise). When the rotation switching member 902 is rotated in the right direction, the first connection member 903 is slid in the right direction, so as described above, the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated in the right direction. It is switched to the state shown in (b). Further, as described above, when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 in the state shown in FIG. 3B, the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated in the left direction, and the first connecting member 903 is By sliding in the left direction, the rotation switching member 902 is rotated in the left direction (counterclockwise), and the second flow path switching member 901f1 is rotated in the right direction (clockwise), as shown in FIG. Switch to the state shown in.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, when the game ball enters the operation opening 670, in a state where the second flow path switching member 901f rotates, the game ball wins the second winning opening 640. Then, the first flow path switching member 900 f does not rotate and flows down (is discharged) to the left first discharge flow path 900 c. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 3A, the weight member 640c is stopped (pushed) in a state of being rotated clockwise (clockwise) at the upper end portion of the rotation switching member 902. Although the details will be described later, the weight member 640c and the non-motor-driven part 640a configured in a blade shape are fixed, and fixed to the rotation shaft 640b so as to rotate together. Then, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the rotation switching member 902 is rotated clockwise (clockwise), the contact between the weight member 640c and the rotation switching member 902 is released, and the weight member The non-electric role thing 640a is also rotated counterclockwise by turning counterclockwise (counter clockwise) by its own weight 640c. In this case, the weight member 640 c pivots to a position facing vertically downward and stops. Thereby, the non-electric role thing 640a is changed into an open state where it is easy to win the game ball to the second winning hole 640a.

  Thereby, when the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated, the open / close switching member 902 connected to the first flow path switching member 900f via the first connection member 903 is in the left direction (counterclockwise) It is pivoted to As a result, the non-motor-actuated role thing 640a will be in a closed state (refer to Drawing 3 (a)).

  On the other hand, the second flow path switching member 901f is rotated by the gaming ball having entered the operation port 670. When the second flow path switching member 901f is rotated, the open / close switching member 902 connected to the second flow path switching member via the second connection member 904 is rotated rightward (clockwise). . As a result, the non-motor-actuated role thing 640a will be in an open state (refer FIG.3 (b)).

  Specifically, first, a structure in which the opening and closing of the non-electric accessory 640 a is mechanically operated (variable) by the rotation of the opening and closing switching member 902 will be described. Thereafter, a structure in which the open / close switching member 902 is rotated based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640 or the operation opening 670 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, the lower end portion of the non-motor-actuated part 640a is connected with a rotation shaft 640b rotatably disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The upper end portion of the weight member 640c is connected to the rotary shaft 640b at the rear side of the base plate 60 and at the rear side of the first discharge flow path where the gaming balls having entered the second winning opening 640 flow down. The weight member 640c is connected so as to be rotated 60 degrees clockwise about the upper end of the weight member 640c when the non-motor-operated part 640a is directed in the vertical direction, and is not connected to the weight member 640c. The relative position to the motorized workpiece 640a is fixed so as not to change.

  Below the weight member 640c, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped opening / closing switching member 902 is rotatable about a central rotation shaft 902a as a rotation center, and the upper end portion can be brought into contact with the weight member 640c. It is supported. The open / close switching member 902 is pivotally supported so that the longest side is in the vertical direction, and the first connecting member 903 is on the upper side of the rotating shaft 902a, and the second connecting member 904 is on the lower side of the rotating shaft 902a. Each is connected from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Although the details will be described later, the first connection member 903 and the second connection member 904 can be moved by a predetermined distance (30 mm) in the left-right direction. By limiting the movable range of the first connection member 903 and the second connection member 904, the rotation range of the open / close switching member 902 is also limited.

  Specifically, at the position where the open / close switching member 902 is turned 30 degrees counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 902a from the vertical state, the upper end of the open / close switching member 902 abuts on the weight member 640c From the first position (see FIG. 3A) to rotate 640 c clockwise by 60 degrees, from the vertical state of the open / close switching member 902 by 30 degrees clockwise about the rotation shaft 902 a In the range to the 2nd position (refer to Drawing 3 (b)) which does not contact weight member 640c, it is rotatable.

  Therefore, when the first connection member 903 is movable leftward and the second connection member 904 is movable rightward, that is, when the open / close switching member 902 is at the first position (see FIG. 3A). Because the weight member 640c is rotated 60 degrees clockwise by the open / close switching member 902 rotated leftward, the non-motorized part 640a connected to the weight member 640c via the rotation shaft 640b is It is vertical (closed).

  On the other hand, when the first connecting member 903 is movable rightward and the second connecting member 904 is movable leftward, that is, when the open / close switching member 902 is at the second position (see FIG. 3B). Is turned to a position where the open / close switching member 902 is in the right direction and does not abut on the weight member 640 c. Here, the weight member 640c is formed of metal (aluminum), and has a mass larger than that of the non-motorized part 640a formed of resin, so the non-motorized part 640a and the weight member 640c are connected by the rotating shaft 640b. The position of the center of gravity in the above state is approximately the same as the center of gravity (center) of the weight member 640c. As a result, when the open / close switching member 902 is in the second position (see FIG. 3B), the open / close switching member 902 does not abut on the weight member 640 c, so the weight member 640 c is vertical The position, that is, the non-motor-operated part 640a is stopped at a position (opened state) rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise around the lower end (rotation shaft 640b).

  In the case where the position of the center of gravity when the non-electric role product 640a and the weight member 640c are connected by the rotation shaft 640b is not approximately the same position as the center of gravity (center) of the weight member 640c, that is, the weight member 640c is not vertical. In order to stand still in the direction, the relative position (angle) of the weight member 640c and the non-motor-actuated part 640a may be appropriately adjusted.

  Thus, the open / close switching member 902 is rotated between the first position (see FIG. 3A) where the open / close switching member 902 abuts on the weight member 640c and the second position (see FIG. 3A) not contacting the weight member 640c. By being moved, the non-motor-operated symbol 640a is opened and closed.

  Next, a structure for rotating the open / close switching member 902 will be described. A first flow path switching member 900f is connected to the other end of the first connection member 903 connected to the open / close switching member 902, and a second flow path switching member 901f is connected to the other end of the second connection member 904. Is connected.

  First, the opening / closing switching member 902 is at the second position (a state of being turned right, see FIG. 3B) by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 and flowing down the first discharge channel 900. The case where it is rotated to the first position (a state where it is turned to the left, see FIG. 3A) will be described. After that, the opening / closing switching member is moved from the first position (the state of being turned to the left, see FIG. 3A) by the gaming ball entering the operation port 670 and flowing down the second discharge passage 901. A case where it is pivoted to two positions (a state of pivoting to the right, see FIG. 3B) will be described.

  The gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 640 passes through the through hole provided at the mounting position of the second winning opening 640 and flows down to the first discharge flow path 900 on the back side of the gaming board 13. The first discharge flow path 900 is formed in a substantially U-shape so that gaming balls can flow down the inside, and is disposed with the back side of the position where the second winning opening 640 is disposed as the upper end Be done. In the first discharge flow channel, a first induction flow channel 900a is formed from the upper end, which is the position on the back side of the second winning opening 640, to the lower left direction and toward the left position of the open / close switching member 902 .

  A first channel switching unit 900 b is formed at the lower end of the first induction channel. In the flow path switching unit 900b, the first flow path switching member 900f is pivotally supported on the back surface of the game board 13 so as to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 900f3, and the downstream of the first flow path switching unit 900b A first right discharge passage 900c and a first left discharge passage 900d are formed downward on the side. Although the details will be described later, when the first flow path switching member 900 is at the first position (see FIG. 3A), the gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 640 goes to the first right discharge flow path 900c. When the first flow path switching member 900d is in the second position (see FIG. 3B), the gaming ball having entered the second winning hole 640 makes the first flow path switching member 900d the first. While rotating to the position, it flows down to the left first discharge passage 900d. The game ball that has flowed down to the first right discharge flow path 900c or the first left discharge flow path 900d is a flow path member for discharging the game balls from the back side of the game board 13 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (island facilities etc.) It is drained to a collective cage (not shown) and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 together with the game balls entered in the other winning openings.

  Here, the first flow path switching member 900 f pivotally supported by the first flow path switching portion 900 b will be described. The first flow path switching member 900f has a rectangular parallelepiped first wall 900f1 formed with the lower end of the rotation shaft 900f3 and the first wall 900f1 at a position 100 degrees counterclockwise from the first wall 900f1. A storage portion capable of receiving one game ball is formed between the first wall portion 900f1 and the second wall portion 900f2 having a second wall portion 900f2 formed in the same manner. The right first discharge flow path 900c is formed at the lower right of the first flow path switching member 900f, and the first flow path is the left side of the right first discharge flow path 900c from the branch portion 900e. A left first discharge passage 900d is formed at the lower left of the switching member 900f.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, when the first flow path switching member 900f is located at the first position (a state where it is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction), the first flow path switching member The housing portion 900 f is directed downward and to the left so as not to face the first guiding channel 900 a. In this case, in the first flow path switching member 900f, the second wall 900f2 on the left side of the housing abuts on the bifurcated portion 900e and is not further rotated in the left direction (counterclockwise). The left first discharge flow passage 900d is closed by the one flow passage switching member 900f. Therefore, the gaming balls having flowed down to the first flow path switching unit 900b flow down to the first right discharge flow path 900c without entering the housing portion of the first flow path switching member 900f.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the first flow path switching member 900f is located at the second position (a state in which it is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction), the first flow path The housing portion of the switching member 900 f is directed upward to face the first guiding channel 900 a. Therefore, the game ball having flowed down to the first flow path switching portion 900b enters the housing portion of the first flow path switching member 900f, and rotates the first flow path switching member 900f in the left direction (counterclockwise). And flow down to the right first discharge flow path 900c. Here, in the present embodiment, when the first flow path switching member 900f is at the second position, the second wall 900f3 on the left side of the housing is more horizontal than the first wall 900f1 on the right side of the housing. Since the weight of the gaming ball entered the housing is added more to the second wall 900f3 on the left side of the housing because it is configured, the first flow path switching member 900f is turned in the left direction (counterclockwise). Be moved.

  As described above, when the first flow path switching member 900 f is located at the first position (a state where it is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction), the gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 640 is , And flows down to the first right discharge passage 900c. On the other hand, when the first flow path switching member 900f is located at the second position (a state where it is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction), the gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 640 is The first flow path switching member 900 f is rotated to the first position, and flows down to the first left discharge flow path 900 d. Therefore, when the first flow path switching member 900f is at the second position, the gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 640 flows down one ball to the left first discharge flow path 900d, and the other gaming balls are at the right first position. 1 will flow down to the discharge flow path 900c.

  Next, the relationship between the first flow path switching member 900 f and the open / close switching member 902 will be described. A mounting hole 900f4 is provided at the upper end (opposite to the rotation shaft 900f3) of the first wall 900f1 of the first flow path switching member 900f, and a connecting member 903 provided on the back of the first discharge flow path 900 is It is attached. In the first flow path switching unit 900b, which is the rear surface side of the first flow path switching member 900f, through holes are formed by router processing at locations corresponding to the movable range of the mounting holes 900f4. Thus, the mounting hole 900f4 of the first flow path switching member 900f and the connecting member 903 can be attached with the flow path member of the first discharge flow path 900 interposed therebetween, and the first member is attached with the connecting member 903 attached thereto. The flow path switching member 900 f is rotatable.

  The connecting member 903 is attached to the upper side of the rotation shaft 902 a of the open / close switching member 902 as described above. Therefore, when the first flow path switching member 900f is rotated in the left direction (counterclockwise), the connecting member 903 attached to the mounting hole 900f4 provided in the first wall 900f1 of the first flow path switching member 900f is It moves to the left. Then, when the connecting member 903 is moved in the left direction, the open / close switching member 902 is rotated in the left direction (counterclockwise) with the rotation shaft 902a as the rotation center, and is rotated to the first position.

  As described above, when the open / close switching member 902 is at the first position (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900 f is at the first position), the open / close switching member 902 contacts the weight member 640 c and It is a case where the non-motor-operated accessory 640a is closed by moving the member 640c in the left direction (see FIG. 3A). On the other hand, when the open / close switching member 902 is at the second position (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is at the second position), the open / close switching member 902 does not abut the weight member 640c, and the weight member This is the case where the non-motor-actuated part 640a is in the open state with 640c in the vertical direction (see FIG. 3B). Therefore, when the non-electric role thing 640a is in the open state (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is at the second position), the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, so that the first The flow path switching member 900 f is pivoted from the second position to the first position, and the non-motor-operated part 640 a is operated (variable) from the open state to the closed state. When the non-electric role thing 640a is in the closed state (that is, when the first flow path switching member 900f is at the first position), the first ball is entered into the second winning opening 640, the first Since the flow path switching member 900 f remains at the first position, the non-motor-operated part 640 a is not operated (variable).

  Next, from the first position (the state in which the open / close switching member is turned to the left, see FIG. 3A) by the gaming ball entering the operation port 670 and flowing down the second discharge flow passage 901 A case where it is pivoted to two positions (a state of pivoting to the right, see FIG. 3B) will be described.

  The gaming ball having entered the operation port 670 flows through the through hole provided at the mounting position of the operation port 670 to the second discharge flow path 901 on the back side of the game board 13. The second discharge flow passage 901 has a structure similar to that of the first discharge flow passage 900 described above, but rotates the open / close switching member 902 from the first position (the state turned to the left) to the second position (the right In that it is configured to be pivoted to the The other points are the same as the first discharge flow path 900 described above, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Specifically, as in the first discharge flow path described above, the second discharge flow path 901 is moved from the second position (the state turned to the right) to the first position (left) by the entered operation port. The second flow path switching member 901f is provided to be turned to the rotated state). The second flow path switching member 901f is connected to the open / close switching member 902 by the second connection member 904, but unlike the first flow path switching member 900f, the second flow path switching member 901f is under the rotation shaft 902a of the open / close switching member 902 And connected. Thus, when the second flow path switching member 901f is at the first position (the state turned to the left), the open / close switching member 902 is at the second position, and the second flow path switching member 901f is at the second position (turn to the right In the moved state, the open / close switching member 902 is at the first position.

  As described above, when the open / close switching member 902 is at the second position (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is at the first position), the open / close switching member 902 does not abut the weight member 640c. In this case, the weight member 640 c is in the vertical direction, and the non-motor-operated object 640 a is in the open state. On the other hand, when the open / close switching member 902 is at the first position (that is, when the second flow path switching member 901f is at the second position), the open / close switching member 902 contacts the weight member 640c and the weight member 640c is left By being moved in the direction, the non-motor-operated part 640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 3A).

  Therefore, when the non-electric role thing 640a is in the closed state (that is, when the second flow passage switching member 901f is in the second position), the gaming ball enters the operation port 670, thereby the second flow passage. The switching member 901 f is pivoted from the second position to the first position, and the non-motor-operated part 640 a is operated (variable) from the closed state to the open state. In the case where the game ball enters the operation opening 670 when the non-electric role thing 640a is already in the open state (that is, when the second flow passage switching member 901f is in the first position), the second flow Since the road switching member 901f remains at the first position, the non-motor-operated part 640a is not operated (variable).

  As described above, when the non-motor-operated part 640 a is in the closed state, the first flow path switching member 900 f is in the first position, and the second flow path switching member 901 f is in the second position. On the other hand, when the non-electric role thing 640a is in the open state, the first flow passage switching member 900f is in the second position, and the second flow passage switching member 901f is in the first position. Here, when the first flow path switching member 900f and the second flow path switching member 901f are at the second position, they are operated (variable) by the game ball entering (passing), but at the first position In the case it is not activated (variable). Therefore, when one of the flow path switching members (the first flow path switching member 900f or the second flow path switching member 901f) can be operated (variable), the other flow path switching member (the second flow path switching member) 901f or the first flow path switching member 900f) is not operated (variable). Thereby, even when the game ball enters the operation opening 670 and the second winning opening 640 simultaneously, the flow path switching member (the first flow path switching member 900f or the second flow path switching member 901f) can be moved without any problem ( Variable).

  Here, when the ball is fired (so-called “right-handed”) so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the first right winning opening 641, the gaming ball is in the operation opening 670. Also enter the ball. As described above, based on the game ball entering the operation opening 670, the non-electric role thing 640a provided accompanying to the second winning opening 640 is opened. When the non-electric role thing 640a is in the open state, the gaming ball fired based on the depression of the skip switch 51c can enter the second winning opening 640.

  The non-electric role thing 640a is maintained in the open state until the game ball enters one ball to the second winning opening 640, and operates to the closed state when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 (variable) Be done. Thus, when the ball is fired (so-called "right-handed") so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80, the gaming ball enters the operation opening 670, and the non-electric role object 640a Since the open state is maintained, it is possible to enter the second winning opening 640 into the game ball shot by pressing the skip switch 51c.

  The positions at which the operation port 670 and the rotary product 680 are disposed are not limited to the right side of the variable display device 80. For example, when the operation port 670 and the rotating object 680 are provided on the left side of the variable display device 80 and the ball is firing (so-called "left-handed") so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device 80, The arrangement may be such that the game ball can enter the operation port 670. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which can stop (skip) the variable display of the first special symbol even in the left-handed gaming state.

  Furthermore, the operation port 670 and the rotary product 680 may be provided below the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 72). Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stopping (skiping) the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in either of the left hitting gaming state and the right hitting gaming state. Details of the operation port 670 and the rotary combination 680 provided below the first winning port 64 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, among the game balls launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, the game balls that did not enter the second winning opening 640 enter the ball because the non-electric role object 640a is in the closed state. The rotary part 680 and the operation port 670 may be provided at the position where In addition, a guiding member may be provided so that the gaming ball that has not entered the second winning opening 640 is guided to the rotating object 680 and the operation opening 670. Thereby, in order to cause the game ball to enter the operation port 670, pressing the skip switch 51c without entering the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 causes the game ball to enter the operation port 670. Can be a playable game machine.

  Furthermore, in this case, two balls (or more than two balls) of game balls may be continuously fired based on the depression of the skip switch 51c. As a result, among the game balls that are continuously fired, the first game ball enters the second winning opening 640 and the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, and the non-electric role thing 640a is closed. After that, of the game balls that are continuously fired, the second game ball enters the operation port 670 because the non-electric role object 640a is in the closed state, and again the non-electric role object 640a Is open. Thereby, since the non-electric role thing 640a will always be in the open state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of causing the game ball to always enter the second winning opening 640 by pressing the skip switch 51c.

  As a method for causing two balls (or more than two balls) of game balls to be fired consecutively, the following method is exemplified. For example, as a structure of the skip switch 51c, it may be in a pressed state in which two balls (or more) of game balls are fired by one pressing operation. Specifically, a mechanism is provided to attenuate the repulsive force necessary for the skip switch 51c to return from the pressed state to the non-pressed state after the skip switch 51c is pressed. Then, the time required for the skip switch 51c to return from the pressed state to the non-pressed state may be the time for which the game ball is fired at two balls (or more). As a mechanism for attenuating the reaction force, in addition to the low resilience material, a damper, a shock absorber and the like can be mentioned.

  In addition, when the skip switch 51c is pressed, power may be supplied to the ball firing unit 112a so that two balls (or more) of game balls are fired. Specifically, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, a capacitor is provided for storing power for firing the gaming ball to the ball firing unit 112a, and two balls (or more) of the gaming ball are fired at the capacitor. It may be configured to store power.

  Furthermore, a launch control unit 112 capable of changing the launch intensity of the launch solenoid based on a signal input from the main control unit 110 is provided, and the press control state of the skip switch 51c in the launch control process (S108) Based on the operation amount, a signal indicating the emission intensity is configured to be transmitted to the emission control device 112. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, the game ball of two balls (or more) may be controlled to be fired with a firing intensity of 100%.

  Return to FIG. 2 and continue the description. A transparent plastic front cover member 600 is attached at a position above the right side of the game board 13 and covering the operation opening 670, the rotating object 680, and the second winning opening 640 described above. The upper portion of the front cover member 600 covering the second winning opening 640 is colored black so that the light transmittance is low and the inside is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the lower part covering the rotating role product 680 and the second winning opening 640 has a pattern (mosaic) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside although it is not colored (it is colorless and transparent) . As a result, the lower part of the game area to which the front cover member 600 is attached, in which the rotary accessory 680 and the second winning opening 640 are covered, is the game area in which the game ball flows down to the player It can be recognized that the area where the second winning opening 640 which is the upper part thereof is disposed is an area where the gaming ball does not flow down to the player.

  A return rubber 600a is attached to the left end of the front cover member 600 at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, and firing is performed based on the maximum operation amount of the operation handle 51. The played game ball (i.e., the game ball launched with a launch intensity of 90%, see the broken line b in FIG. 2) strikes the return rubber 600a and is repelled toward the central portion side while the momentum is attenuated. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the area above the position at which the return rubber 600a is attached is not an area (playing area) where the gaming ball flows down.

  In addition, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above, The inside of the front cover member 600 may be easy to visually recognize, and you may make it not provide a front cover member. This makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the open / close state of the non-electric role thing 640a and the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 640, thereby improving the player's interest.

  On the other hand, the game ball fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed (that is, the game ball launched with 90% firing strength (see the broken line a in FIG. 2) passes above the return rubber 600a, If the non-electric role thing 640a is in the open state, the ball is entered into the second winning hole 640. Therefore, the gaming ball is fired to the area which the player recognizes as not being the gaming area, and enters the second winning opening 640. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the first special symbol has been stopped based on entering the second winning opening 640, so that it is possible to perform the first operation based on the operation of the skip switch 51c. It can give the impression that the special symbol has been stopped.

  The return rubber 600a is attached between the closed non-electric role piece 640a with a space where the game ball can flow down, and the non-electric role piece 640a is opened to fill this gap. Is activated (variable). Therefore, if the non-motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, the gaming ball flowing down the upper side of the return rubber 600a is guided to the second winning opening 640 by the non-motorized accessory 640a. Ru. On the other hand, if the non-electric role thing 640a is not opened, the game ball which flows down the upper side of the return rubber 600a is prevented from entering the second winning hole 640 by the non-electric role thing 640a, and the non-electric role thing 640a Through the gap between the and the return rubber 600a, and flows down to the game area where the through gate 67 and the like are arranged below.

  The variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower left side of the first right winning opening 641, and a first specific winning opening 65 a is provided substantially at the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the predetermined time (variation time) is determined when the lottery performed for winning the first winning opening 64, the first right winning opening 641 or the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The occurrence of is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  In addition, if the lottery performed due to the winning in the second winning opening 640 becomes a small winning, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, it will be the first symbol display device 37A or the stop symbol of the small hitting While turning on the first symbol display device 37B, the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the small hit is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a small hitting gaming state in which the ball is less likely to win, compared to the special gaming state described above. In this small hitting game state, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 which is normally closed is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment). Further, the opening and closing operation is performed twice in the small hitting gaming state, and in this small hitting gaming state, the game ball hardly enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the first specified winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b for driving to open / close to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis And). The first specified winning combination opening 65 a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the first specified winning opening 65a is easy to win, and the open state and normal time It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state of.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning hole 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning hole 64, For example, it may be below the first winning opening 64.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 641, 640 and 65 is guided to the ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 66. The out port 66 is disposed below the first winning port 64 and at the lower end of the game area (the lower end of the inner rail 61).

  Therefore, it is a ball which flows down the game area, and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 641, 640, 65, and the game ball which has reached the inner rail 61 which is the outer edge of the game area is the inner rail. It flows down along the slope of 61 and is guided through the out port 66 to the ball discharge path.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 4). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 4, 122) is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are drawings for explaining the effect screen of the pressing suggestion effect in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  First, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating the actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) of which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out, etc.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the ball is entered The number of times is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry to the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 is configured to be held up to four times at the maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times It may be set to three or less (for example, twice), or five or more times (for example, eight). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is different by the number of number-hold balls. (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, entry to the second winning opening 640 is not held, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same as the first winning opening 64 or the first right winning opening 641 described above. May be configured to be suspended up to 4 times. Furthermore, the maximum number of holding balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less (for example, twice), or five or more (for example, eight).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the contents of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIGS. 6 and 7 schematically illustrate an example of the pressing suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the non-electric role object 640a is in the open state while the variation based on the first special symbol is being executed. It is the schematic diagram shown.

  FIG. 6 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an indication at the time of opening indicative of depression which is indication of depression which is displayed when the non-electric role object 640a is in the open state during a change based on the first special symbol. When the variation based on the first special symbol is executed, the third symbol is variably displayed in the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. And, when the variation based on the first special symbol is executed (displayed), when the non-electric role object 640a is in the open state, it suggests the pressing of the skip switch 51c in the lower right part of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the opening is done, a suggestion to suggest a press is displayed. Specifically, together with the characters "battle or skip", an image of a button imitating the operation handle 51 having the characters "PUSH" and the skip switch 51c at the lower position of the screen of the characters is displayed. In addition, when the change based on the first special symbol is started, if the non-electric role thing 640a is already in the open state, from the point when the change based on the first special symbol is started, the depression pressing suggestion effect at the time of opening Is displayed.

  When the skip switch 51c is pressed and the game ball enters the second winning opening during the display of the suggestion effect at the time of opening, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. The lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit with high probability (388/400). When the variation C (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern based on the small special lottery result, the skip effect shown in FIG. 6 (b) is selected. Is displayed. Specifically, the character of "skip!" Is displayed under the variable display of the third symbol displayed at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the variation of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper right portion of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, and the variation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, it is not restricted to this, while the character of "skip!" Is displayed, the change of the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the change of the first special symbol is difficult to see (or not made). It may be changed to As a result, when the character "skip!" Is displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the fluctuation of the first special symbol has been stopped.

  This skip effect is displayed for 2.5 seconds until a change C (0.5 seconds) based on the small hit of the second special symbol is executed, and then a small hit game (2.0 seconds) is performed. . Then, when the small hitting game is ended and a new change based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is started, the display of the skip effect is ended. As described above, the characters “Skip!” Should be displayed in the center of the screen that is easy for the player to visually recognize, and the variable display based on the lottery result of the second special symbol should be displayed in the upper right part of the screen where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize Then, it can be made difficult to recognize that the variation based on the small hit of the second special symbol and the small hit game are executed. Thereby, during the change of the first special symbol, based on pressing the skip switch 51c, the change of the first special symbol being executed may be skipped and the new change of the first special symbol may be started. It can give the impression of being a possible gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 (a), the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes small hit during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and as a fluctuation pattern based on the lottery result of the small hit, fluctuation A (30 seconds The battle effect displayed when) is selected will be described.

  In the battle effect shown in FIG. 7 (a), the variation display of the third symbol displayed at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced at the top left of the screen and stopped and displayed at the top of the center of the screen. The word "battle!" Is displayed, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and the image of the monster is displayed on the right side of the center of the screen. Further, at the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, a variable display based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed.

  In this embodiment, even when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the above-described battle effect is displayed by the pseudo effect change process (FIG. 46). It is configured as follows. It is assumed that the skip effect and the battle effect described above are not executed even if the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 when the change based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the first This is because the player can easily determine that the variation of the special symbol is a big hit. When the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 by the above-described battle effect being displayed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46), the battle effect is produced regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. Since (see FIG. 7A) is displayed, it can be difficult to determine that the variation of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this battle effect, when the first special symbol is not a big hit and the change of the first special symbol is stopped based on the winning to the second winning opening 640, then the main character loses the battle with the monster An effect (off battle effect) is displayed, and the characters “Sorry! Off!” Are displayed on the upper center of the screen. Then, the change of the second special symbol and the change to the normal display content as the small hitting game ends, and the new change of the first special symbol is started. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a big hit, and the battle effect is being executed based on the winning of the second prize port 640, an effect that the hero wins the battle with the monster (clash effect) Is displayed, and the characters “I did it! Jackpot!” Are displayed in the upper center of the screen. And while change of the 1st special symbol is completed, it is transferred to the jackpot game of the 1st special symbol.

  A bar-shaped HP gauge is displayed on the upper side of the monster displayed in this battle effect (see FIG. 7 (a)), and the length of this HP gauge indicates the degree of expectation that the main character wins the battle with the monster. It is suggested. Specifically, the first special symbol is not a big hit, but the variation of the first special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the second winning opening 640, and then the hero loses the battle with the monster. When an effect to be displayed is displayed, the HP gauge is configured to be easy to select a long effect. On the other hand, the first special symbol is a big hit, and the battle effect is being executed based on the winning of the second prize port 640, and then the effect that the hero wins the battle with the monster is displayed If so, the HP gauge makes it easy to select short effects. Thereby, when the effect that the HP gauge is short is displayed, the effect that the main character wins the battle with the monster is displayed, and it can be suggested that the possibility of becoming a big hit is high. Note that the aspect that suggests the degree of expectation is not limited to the HP gauge, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by other presentation aspects. For example, the type of the appearing monster may be different depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot, and the type of the output music may be different depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot.

  The battle effect described above is ended in synchronization with the variation display based on the jackpot of the first special symbol or the end timing of the small hitting game of the second special symbol. Specifically, while the variable display based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is ended, the effect that the hero wins the battle with the monster (clash battle effect) is ended, and the jackpot game is started. In addition, the small hitting game of the second special symbol ends, the effect that the hero loses the battle with the monster (outward battle effect) is ended, and a new variable display based on the first special symbol is started.

  Here, production time of battle production is explained. Out of battle production in this embodiment is a total of 12 seconds of a battle production period (30 seconds) which is a period for displaying a battle production and a production result notification period (2 seconds) for which a result of the battle production is notified. It is configured to be a presentation time. This out-of-order battle effect is started when fluctuation A (30 seconds) based on the small hit of the second special symbol is started, and fluctuation A (30 seconds) based on the small hit of the second special symbol Is executed, and it is ended at the timing when the small hit game (2 seconds) to be executed thereafter is ended, that is, 32 seconds after the long variation based on the small hit of the second special symbol is started. Therefore, the end timing of the out-of-round battle effect displayed based on the entry of the game ball to the second winning opening 640 and the end timing of the variable display based on the second special symbol can be made to coincide with each other. It is possible to provide an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, as a hit battle effect in this embodiment, a revival battle effect (effect time: 20 seconds to 30 seconds), a first hit battle effect (effect time: 10 seconds to 20 seconds), and a second hit battle effect ( Production time: 5 seconds to 10 seconds) and three types are prepared. This hit battle effect is started when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the movement based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol According to the remaining fluctuation time of, any of the above-mentioned three types of hit battle effect is selected. Thereby, during the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the end timing of the battle effect displayed based on the entering of the gaming ball to the second winning opening 640, and the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol The end timing, that is, the start timing of the jackpot game of the first special symbol can be made to coincide with one another, and the player can be provided with a feeling of no discomfort.

  In the case where the winning battle effect is executed, the fluctuation (variation A (30 seconds)) of the second special symbol is started based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 640. Therefore, since the fluctuation (30 seconds) of the second special symbol is longer than each battle effect described above, the fluctuation of the second special symbol remains at the end of each battle effect. However, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, so based on the jackpot of the first special symbol The change timing can be matched with the stop timing of the battle effect, that is, the end timing of each battle effect and the stop timing of the change of the second special symbol, and the player can be provided with an effect without a sense of discomfort.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less, the above-mentioned battle effect can not be executed (displayed) because the remaining fluctuation time (rendering time) is short. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a one-shot notification effect for notifying a big hit is performed (displayed). As a result, even when the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is short, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of no discomfort.

  In addition, it is not restricted to this, You may make it perform (display) the battle production etc. which were mentioned irrespective of the remaining fluctuation time of a 1st special symbol. For example, a battle effect or the like may be executed (displayed) in accordance with the variation time of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 (b), a description will be given of a pressing suggestion effect at the time of closing, which is a pressing suggestion effect displayed when the non-electric role object 640a is in the closed state during fluctuation based on the first special symbol. . FIG. 7 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the closing suggestion effect at the time of closing.

  When the variation based on the first special symbol is executed, the third symbol is variably displayed in the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. And when the non-electric role thing 640a is in a closed state, it is pressed at the time of closing which suggests pressing-down of the skip switch 51c on the screen lower right part of the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223e. Suggested effects are displayed.

  Specifically, an image of a button imitating the operation handle 51 having the character of "PUSH" and the skip switch 51c displayed at the lower right portion of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the depression suggestion effect at the time of opening is displayed. At the same time, the gauge is displayed at the top, and the text "You will receive a comment when the button is pressed for MAX" is displayed at the top. In the gauge, the area to be lit and displayed increases with the left end as a starting point based on the depression of the skip switch 51c. When all areas of this gauge are lit and displayed, that is, when the gauge increases to MAX, a comment is displayed at the bottom of the variation display of the third symbol displayed at the center of the screen. The comment displayed here is an indication of the expectation of becoming a big hit.

  As a result, a privilege is presented to display a comment suggesting the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, so it is possible to urge the player to depress the skip switch 51c. In addition, pressing the skip switch 51c consumes a predetermined number of gaming balls (that is, gaming value), but a comment is displayed that suggests an expectation of becoming a big hit instead of the consumed gaming value. Thus, the player's disadvantage can be reduced.

  In addition, as mentioned above, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol is short (5 seconds or less), the game ball to the second winning opening 640 When entering the ball, a one-shot notification effect is displayed. This is the first special symbol even though the battle effect is displayed when the battle effect is displayed when the remaining change time of the change based on the first special symbol is short (five seconds or less). The change based on the is ended, the jackpot game is started, and there is a problem that the player is confused.

  Therefore, in the state where the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less, the display mode of the indication at the time of opening may be changed. In this way, an effect (one-shot notification effect) different from the effect (such as a battle effect) displayed based on entry to the second winning opening 640 when an open-time depression suggestion effect is displayed is executed. Can be recognized to the player. In addition, the change timing of this pressing suggestion effect is not limited to the above-mentioned (the remaining fluctuation time of fluctuation based on the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less), for example, the remaining fluctuation time of fluctuation based on the first special symbol is 10 It may be seconds or less, or 3 seconds or less. Furthermore, the display timing of the pressing suggestion effect may be varied according to the degree of expectation that the change based on the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) becomes a big hit, a predetermined counter value, or the like.

  In addition, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above, and when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 in the state where the remaining fluctuation time of fluctuation based on the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less, any effect change is performed You may leave it as it is. This makes it possible for the player to think that the game ball has not entered the second winning opening 640, or that the lottery result based on the winning at the second winning opening 640 has been removed, and then reports a jackpot. By doing this, unexpectedness can be given to the player and interest can be improved.

  The image of the button (the image of the button imitating the operation handle 51 and the skip switch 51c) displayed in the open pressing suggestion effect at the opening time and the pressing suggestion effect at the closing time in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests pressing of the frame button 22. It is different from the used button image (cylindrical button image). As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player which button to press, and it is possible to provide an easily understandable gaming machine.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the button displayed in the open pressing suggestion effect and the closing pressing suggestion effect may be an image or a character indicating the position of the button (e.g. ) May be used. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that pressing of the skip switch 51c is suggested.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the skip effect and the battle effect described above are configured to be displayed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it may be displayed when the skip switch 51c is pressed. This makes it possible to intensify the impression that a skip effect or the like is displayed by pressing the skip switch 51c. In addition, during a period from the pressing of the skip switch 51c to the game ball entering the second winning opening 640, an effect different from the skip effect or the battle effect may be separately performed. Thereby, the display of the effect (such as skip effect) displayed based on the depression of the skip switch 51c and the entering or entering of the second winning opening 640 of the game ball launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c. It is possible to suppress the problem that inconsistency occurs with the lottery result based on.

  Further, the probability that the above-described pressing suggestion effects (opening indication suggestion effects, closing indication suggestion effects) are displayed may be changed according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is large, the pressing suggestion effect is easily displayed, and when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is small, the pressing suggestion effect is hardly displayed. . Thereby, when the number of holding balls is large, it is possible to easily skip the change of the first special symbol and to suppress the overflow of the entering ball by displaying the pressing suggestion effect. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is small, by not displaying the pressing suggestion effect, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not skipped, so the holding balls are quickly digested and the time when the fluctuation display is not increased It is possible to suppress the problem of the end result.

  Furthermore, the content of the pressing suggestion effect may be changed according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is large, an effect (for example, “press the skip switch !!”) strongly urging pressing of the skip switch 51 c is displayed, and the first special symbol is held In the case where the number of balls is small, an effect weakly prompting the user to press the skip switch 51 c (for example, “Can I press the skip switch?”) May be displayed. This makes it easy to skip the variation of the first special symbol by displaying a pressing suggestion effect strongly urging the skip switch 51c to be pressed if the number of holding balls is large, thereby suppressing the overflow of the entering ball. it can. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is small, a pressing suggestion effect for weakly pressing the skip switch 51c is displayed, and a pressing suggestion effect for strongly pressing the skip switch 51c is not displayed, whereby the fluctuation of the first special symbol is skipped. Because it is not done, it is possible to digest the holding balls and reduce the time when the variable display is not displayed.

  In addition, the above-described opening pressing suggestion effect and closing suggestion effect may be executed on the basis of the prefetched result of the lottery result of the first special symbol. For example, when it is pre-read that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, it is easy to display a pressing suggestion effect that urges pressing of the skip switch 51c. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to skip out-of-range fluctuations, so it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. Note that the depression suggestion effect may be executed based on the pre-read result only in the case of a specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the third ball is a big hit among the holding balls of the first special symbol, the skip effect of the first ball and the second ball holding ball is a continuous aspect (continuous pressing suggestion The effect of the effect may be performed (displayed). Specifically, during the change based on the holding ball of the first ball, an effect accompanied by the characters "Find key!" Is displayed, and a pressing suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters "Acquire key!" Is displayed, and the variation based on the first holding ball is stopped. Next, during the movement based on the second holding ball, the effect accompanied by the text "Open treasure box with acquired key!" Is displayed, and at the same time a pressing suggestion effect prompting the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters "treasure box opened!" Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the second holding ball is stopped. After that, in the variation based on the holding ball of the third ball serving as the jackpot, an effect accompanied by the letters “Congratulations! Jackpot !!” is displayed.

  By performing (displaying) such continuous depression suggestion effects, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of becoming a big hit, so it is possible to improve the player's interest. In addition, since the fluctuation based on the holding ball serving as the big hit can not be forcibly stopped, the change based on the holding ball serving as the big hit may not indicate pressing of the skip switch 51c. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the mode of presentation based on entering the ball into the second winning opening 640 so as to suggest pressing of the skip switch 51c during fluctuation based on the holding ball serving as a big hit. It is also good.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In order to instruct the peripheral control devices (sub control devices) such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices are performed by the data transmission / reception circuit. Is transmitted, but such a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in only one direction.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area in which various flags, counters, values of I / O, etc. Region) and. The RAM 203 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. A payout control device 111 is connected to the input / output port 205 via connectors 207 and 217, and an audio lamp control device 113 is connected via connectors 208 and 228, respectively. In addition, the I / O port 205 is connected to various switches 206 including a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a launch control device 112, an external output terminal plate 261, and switches and sensors not shown. ing. A hall computer 262 is configured to be connectable to the external output terminal plate 261, and data and the like can be output from the main control device 110 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball feed solenoid 154 to place the ball on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 when the main control device 110 instructs the ball to be fired, and controls the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The firing solenoid 142 is controlled so as to achieve the hitting strength of the ball. The launch solenoid 142 and the ball feed solenoid 154 are permitted to operate when the predetermined conditions are met.

  Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the operation handle 51 is detected by the touch sensor 51a, and the payout control is performed on the condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). A release permission signal SG3 is input from the signal conversion circuit 241 of the substrate 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. When the emission permission signal SG3 is input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 outputs the emission control signal α and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205 to the emission control device 112. When the emission control signal α is input to the emission control device 112, voltage is supplied to the emission solenoid 142, and the emission solenoid 142 sets the ball previously disposed on the front surface of the emission solenoid 142 to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. Fire toward the game area with the strength according to. Further, when the ball feed control signal β is input to the launch control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the ball feed solenoid 154, and the gaming ball is disposed on the front of the launch solenoid 142.

  Here, the release permission signal SG3 will be described. The release permission signal SG3 is a signal output from the signal conversion circuit 241 in the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The signal conversion circuit 241 that outputs the emission permission signal SG3 mainly includes an AND circuit which is a logic circuit. The emission permission signal SG3 is turned on only when the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off, and is turned off if any of the sensors does not satisfy the above condition. Since the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the strike-off switch 51b is turned off when the player rotates the operating handle 51 with the intention of firing, the player intends the operating handle in principle. In the state where the rotation operation of 51 is performed, the ball is fired by the firing solenoid 142.

  It should be noted that the firing of the ball of the firing solenoid 142 and the placement of the ball on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 performed by the ball feed solenoid 154 are not simultaneous.

  In addition, a skip switch 51c (see FIG. 1) is connected to the emission control device 112, and when the skip switch 51c is on (when the switch is pressed), the above-described rotation operation of the operation handle 51c is performed. Regardless of the quantity, the firing solenoid 142 is controlled to have a constant launch strength (launch strength = 100%). On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is off (when not pressed), as described above, the launch strength of the ball according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51c (launch intensity = 0% to 90%) The firing solenoid 142 is controlled to be

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the skip switch 51c is off (not pressed), the launch strength of the launch solenoid 142 (launch intensity = 0% to 90%) is that the launched game ball is the first one. The shot strength does not reach the 2 winning opening 640 (see the broken line b in FIG. 2). On the other hand, when the skip switch 51 c is on (pressed), the launch strength of the launch solenoid 142 (launch strength 100%) is the launch strength at which the launched game ball can reach the second winning opening 640. (See dashed line a in FIG. 2). Therefore, when the skip switch 51c is not pressed, the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640 and when the skip switch 51c is pressed, the game ball can enter the second winning opening 640. .

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  In the work area of the RAM 213, a total prize ball number memory 213a, an upper command storage buffer 213b, a payout error flag 213c, and a payout permission flag 213d are provided.

  The total prize ball number memory 213a is a memory for storing the total number of unpaid prize balls to be paid out by the payout control device 111. When the ball driven into the game area is paid to any one of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a and this is detected by the main control unit 110, the payout of the number of winning balls according to the winning is determined by the winning ball command. The main control unit 110 instructs the payout control unit 111 to execute. In the total prize ball number memory 213a, the payout number of the prize balls instructed by the prize ball command is added and stored. If the value of the total winning balls number memory 213a is not 0, the winning balls are paid out, and the value is decremented by one every time one paid ball is detected. The payout of the winning balls is performed until the value of the total winning balls number memory 213a becomes zero.

  The upper command storage buffer 213 b is a buffer for storing the upper command (the first byte command) among the 2-byte commands output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. The main controller 110 outputs a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and 15 types of award ball commands to the payout control device 111, but these upper commands (99H) are output to the upper command storage buffer 213b. , AAH, F0H to FEH) are stored. The content of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 when the lower command (the second byte command) is input.

  The payout error flag 213c is a flag that is turned on when the payout control device 111 can not normally input a 2-byte command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. When the payout error flag 213c is turned on, the character "C" is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121, and the occurrence of a command error is notified. The dispensing error flag 213c, which has been turned on once, is turned off when a 2-byte normal command is input. When the payout error flag 213c is turned off, the error display of the 7-segment LED 121 is also canceled.

  The payout permission flag 213d is a flag for permitting payout of winning balls and lending balls, and while being turned off in the start-up process (S1614 in FIG. 38), a normal command (payout) output from the main control device 110 When an initialization command, a payout return command, a winning ball command, etc.) is input, it is turned on. That is, the payout permission flag 213d is a flag for confirming that the main control device 110 has risen.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110 is connected to the input / output port 215 via the connectors 207 and 217, and a 7-segment LED 121, a payout motor 216, an external output terminal plate 261, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 241, and although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out is connected. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The 7-segment LED 121 is a display (display means) for notifying of the state of the payout control device 111. When the payout control device 111 inputs a command output from the main control device 110 and it is determined that the command is a non-specified command (invalid command), the character “C” is displayed by the 7-segment LED 121 It is displayed, and the occurrence of a command error is notified. Further, a hall computer 262 is configured to be connectable to the external output terminal board 261, and data and the like can be output from the payout control device 111 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. An error or the like generated in the payout control device 111 can also be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 262.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in the above. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110 is connected to the input / output port 225 via the connectors 208 and 228, and the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected.

  Further, the operation port induction flow path switch 800 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. The operation opening guide flow path switch 800 is a switch for detecting a game ball passing between the non-electric accessory 640 a and the return rubber 600 a at the left end of the front cover member 600 (operation opening induction flow path). . When the non-motor-operated part 640a is in the closed state, a game ball emitted based on the depression of the skip switch 51c (ie, the non-motor-based part 640a is in the closed state). The game ball which did not enter the second winning opening 640 flows down. Also, the gaming ball having passed through the operation opening guiding flow path is guided to the rotating object 680 as described above. Therefore, when the operation port induction flow path switch 800 is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball passes through the operation port induction flow path), then the gaming ball enters the rotating role product 680 and the operation port 670 It is likely that the game ball is likely to enter the ball.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitoring power supply interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 having a RAM erase switch 123. ing. The power supply unit 251 supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, 12 volts for driving various switches, solenoids, motors, etc., 5 volts for logic, RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and the necessary voltages of 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Thus, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit that outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data (the content of the RAM 203) when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input.

  Next, referring to FIG. 9, the launch control device 112 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the emission control device 112. As shown in FIG. The emission control device 112 includes a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, an addition circuit unit 303, a voltage supply unit 304, an emission solenoid control unit 305, and a ball feeding solenoid control unit 306. It is done.

  The voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is a circuit that divides a DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51, and the operational resistor OP1 and a variable resistor whose resistance value is variable. It is constituted by the device VR2. Here, the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted in resistance value by an operation knob 122a (not shown).

  The positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1, which is the input side of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, has a variable resistor VR1 that detects the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance It is configured to be connected to one of the fixed resistors R8. Whether the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is connected to either the variable resistor VR1 or the resistor R8 is determined by the state (on or off) of the skip switch 51c. Specifically, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the resistor R8 is connected to the plus input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the skip switch 51c is off (not pressed). The variable resistor VR1 is connected to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1.

  Here, a DC power supply DC1 of 5 volts is connected to one end of the variable resistor VR1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR1 is grounded. This is because the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51, and a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR1. This is to input the signal SA1) to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1.

  On the other hand, a 5-volt DC power supply DC1 is connected to one end of the resistor R8 in the same manner as the variable resistor VR1 described above, and the other end of the resistor R8 is grounded. Thus, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), a signal (based on the current generated by the DC power supply DC1 (5 volts) and the resistor R8 regardless of the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51) The signal SA1) can be input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1.

  In the present embodiment, the resistance value of the resistor R8 is smaller than the minimum resistance value of the variable resistor VR1. Thereby, the current generated in the resistor R8 can be made larger than the current generated in the variable resistor VR1, and a signal based on the current is input to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1. Thereby, the emission intensity (100%) defined by the signal based on the current generated in the resistor R8 is stronger than the emission intensity (0 to 90%) defined by the signal based on the current generated in the variable resistor VR1 It can be made to the firing strength.

  It is to be noted that the voltage (5 volts) may be applied to the resistor R8 and the current value may be measured only when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), not limited to the above. Furthermore, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the voltage (5 volts) may not be applied to the variable resistor VR1. As a result, it is possible to save the current (that is, the consumed power) generated by the resistor (the resistor R8 or the variable resistor VR1) that is not input to the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1.

  Next, the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is short-circuited with the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the output of the operational amplifier OP1 is directly fed back to the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1. Therefore, the operational amplifier OP1 is used as a buffer circuit that outputs the DC voltage input from the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification factor of approximately 1.

  One end of a variable resistor VR2 is connected in series to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR2 is grounded. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SA1) input from the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification factor of approximately 1, and the output DC voltage is variable It is divided by the resistor VR2. The divided DC voltage is input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303. The direct current voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 with the operation knob 122a (not shown).

  Further, the variation width of the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is reduced by the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 It is possible to adjust the range and the range width of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area. However, since the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 divides the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2, the variable resistor VR1 Smaller than the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in The reduced voltage can be compensated by the DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 described below to the addition circuit unit 303.

  The addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is a circuit that generates a DC voltage of a fixed value, and includes a 12 volt DC power supply DC2, a resistor R1 having a fixed resistance value, a variable resistor VR3 having a variable resistance value, and a Zener. It is comprised by the diode D1 and capacitor | condenser CD1. Here, the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted in resistance value by an operation knob 122b (not shown).

  The other end of the variable resistor VR3 is grounded, and one end of the variable resistor VR3 is connected to the cathode of the zener diode D1, one end of the capacitor CD1, and one end of the resistor R1. Since the anode of the Zener diode D1 is grounded, the Zener diode D1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel. Further, since the other end of the capacitor CD1 is grounded, the capacitor CD1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel in the same manner as the Zener diode D1. Therefore, the capacitor CD1, the zener diode D1, and the variable resistor VR3 constitute a parallel circuit. The other end of the resistor R1 is connected to a 12 volt DC power supply DC2. The zener diode D1 is used to stabilize a constant voltage generated in the zener diode D1 in order to set a direct voltage generated in the zener diode D1 to a constant value (constant voltage). Also, the resistor R1 is used to limit the current supplied from the 12 volt DC power supply DC2.

  A 12 volt DC voltage supplied from a 12 volt DC power supply DC2 is divided by a resistor R1 and a parallel circuit of a capacitor CD1, a zener diode D1 and a variable resistor VR3. The constant DC voltage (Zener voltage) generated in the Zener diode D1 is also generated in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel with the Zener diode D1. Here, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 with the operation knob 122b (not shown), the DC voltage output from the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted with a voltage equal to or less than the Zener voltage. The direct current voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303. Here, by inputting the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which is the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area is changed. Instead, only the range can be adjusted (signal SC1 in FIG. 9). Therefore, by dividing the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is Even if the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 becomes smaller, the reduced voltage can be compensated by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3.

  Since the DC voltage supplied from the 12 volt DC power supply DC2 is made constant by using the Zener diode D1, the DC voltage supplied from the 12 volt DC power supply DC2 becomes unstable, and the DC voltage Also when changing, the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 becomes a stable constant value (constant voltage). Therefore, a stable constant voltage is generated also in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel to the Zener diode D1, and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 also becomes a stable constant voltage.

  The addition circuit unit 303 adds the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 (adds up ) And is composed of resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 whose resistance values are fixed, and an operational amplifier OP2.

  The variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is connected to one end of the resistor R3. Here, the resistances of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 are all the same, and the other end of the resistor R3 is connected to the other end of the resistor R2 and the positive input terminal (noninverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2. ing. The negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 is connected to one end of the resistor R4 and one end of the resistor R5, and the other end of the resistor R4 is the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 and the other end of the resistor R5 Is grounded.

  Therefore, the circuit composed of the resistors R2, R3, R4 and R5 and the operational amplifier OP2 is a DC voltage (generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301) input from one end of the resistor R2 (signal SB1) Functions as an adder circuit that adds together (adds up) a DC voltage (generated in variable resistor VR3 of addition voltage adjustment section 302) input from one end of resistor R3 and outputs it from the output terminal of operational amplifier OP2 Do. The DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304.

  The voltage supply unit 304 is a circuit that supplies a voltage to the emission solenoid 142, and includes an operational amplifier OP3, a low pass filter F1, a DC-DC converter CV1 that is a booster, and a DC power supply DC3 that supplies a DC voltage of 32 volts. It is constituted by the capacitor CD2. Since the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 are short-circuited, the operational amplifier OP3 functions as a buffer amplifier. The positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303. Therefore, the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is input from the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP3, has an amplification factor of approximately 1, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3.

  The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the input terminal of the low pass filter F1, and the low pass filter F1 reduces noise (high frequency component) superimposed on the DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3. The output terminal of the low pass filter F1 is connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and further, to the DC-DC converter CV1, a DC power supply DC3 for supplying a DC voltage of 32 volts is connected. A DC voltage of 32 volts is supplied from the power supply DC3 to the DC-DC converter CV1. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SC1) output from the output terminal of the low pass filter F1 is boosted to the DC voltage Ec by the DC-DC converter CV1.

  One end (plus terminal) of the capacitor CD2 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 is grounded. Therefore, the boosted DC voltage Ec output from the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1 is applied to the capacitor CD2 when the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 described later is interrupted. As a result, a charge determined by the product of the capacity of the capacitor CD2 and the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 is stored in the capacitor CD2. A voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 142 in accordance with the charge stored in the capacitor CD2.

  In addition, one end of the emission solenoid 142 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the other end of the emission solenoid 142 is connected to the drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 of the emission solenoid controller 305. . Further, a diode D2 is connected between one end and the other end of the discharge solenoid 142 at a stage subsequent to the capacitor CD2, the cathode of the diode D2 is connected to one end of the discharge solenoid 142, and the anode of the diode D2 is connected to the discharge solenoid 142. It is connected to the other end. The diode D2 suppresses the back electromotive force (surge voltage) generated after the firing operation of the ball of the firing solenoid 142.

  The emission solenoid control unit 305 is a circuit for controlling the on / off of the emission solenoid 142, and includes a resistor R6 whose resistance value is fixed, a low pass filter F2, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, an FET switch SW1, and 5 volts. It is comprised by DC-power-supply DC1 which supplies a DC voltage.

  The input terminal of the low pass filter F2 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110, and one end of the resistor R6 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low pass filter F2. The other end of the resistor R6 is connected to the DC power supply DC1. When the input / output port 205 is in the on state (5 volts state), 5 volts is input to the input terminal of the low pass filter F2 and the input / output port 205 Is in the off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low pass filter F2 is in the non-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, the emission control signal α, which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on, is input to the input terminal of the low pass filter F2.

  When the emission control signal α is input to the input terminal of the low pass filter F2, the noise (high frequency component) superimposed on the emission control signal α is reduced by the low pass filter F2. The output terminal of the low pass filter F2 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, and the emission control signal α input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is shaped by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 and the waveform is inverted. And is output as the emission control signal γ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 is connected to the other end of the emission solenoid 142, one end of which is connected to the DC-DC converter CV1, and the anode of the diode D2, and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is grounded. Therefore, when the emission control signal γ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are conducted, and the emission solenoid 142 receives the capacitor CD2. A voltage E1 (maximum value Ec volts) generated by the stored charge is applied. As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 protrudes and shoots the ball disposed on the front of the firing solenoid 142 toward the game area. The voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the charge stored in the capacitor CD2 becomes Ec volt of the maximum value at the moment of application, and the voltage value decreases with the passage of time.

  On the other hand, when the emission control signal γ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (zero voltage state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is cut off, and the voltage is applied to the emission solenoid 142 E1 is not applied. Thereby, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is returned from the projecting state to the initial state by a spring (not shown) provided inside the firing solenoid 142.

  The ball feed solenoid control unit 306 is a circuit for controlling the on / off of the ball feed solenoid 154, and includes a resistor R7 having a fixed resistance value, a low pass filter F3, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, a FET switch SW2, A DC power source DC1 for supplying a DC voltage of volts and a DC power source DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts are provided.

  The input terminal of the low pass filter F3 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110, and one end of the resistor R7 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low pass filter F3. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to the DC power supply DC1. When the input / output port 205 is in the on state (5 volts state), 5 volts is input to the input terminal of the low pass filter F3. Is in the off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low pass filter F3 is in the non-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, the ball feed control signal β, which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on, is input to the input terminal of the low pass filter F3.

  When the ball feed control signal β is input to the input terminal of the low pass filter F3, the low pass filter F3 reduces the noise (high frequency component) superimposed on the ball feed control signal β. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, and the ball feed control signal β input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is shaped by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 and the waveform is It is inverted and output as the ball feed control signal δ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW2 is connected to the other end of the ball feed solenoid 154 and the anode of the diode D3, and the cathode of the diode D3 and a DC voltage of 12 volts are supplied to one end of the ball feed solenoid 154 Is connected. The source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is grounded. Therefore, when the ball feed control signal δ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are conducted, and the ball feed solenoid 154 is supplied with DC power. A 12 volt DC voltage E2 supplied from DC2 is applied. As a result, the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excited), and the gaming ball is accommodated in the holder portion 155a (not shown). The diode D3 suppresses the surge voltage generated when the ball feed solenoid 154 is switched from on to off.

  On the other hand, when the ball feed control signal δ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (zero voltage state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is cut off. DC voltage E2 is not applied. As a result, the delivery member 155 is pivoted downward by its own weight, and the ball G1 accommodated in the holder portion 155a (not shown) is delivered downward and disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a sensor (not shown) and the like in addition to those described above. For example, a vibration sensor is attached to the back of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 10, since winning in the winning opening is an important factor in determining the gaming state, it is necessary to change the flow of balls by vibration and to prevent the winning in the winning opening intentionally. Therefore, if it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by the player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and includes an error type including an error type. It transmits to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 39) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with an execution area (for example, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c) and a holding area (for example, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a) corresponding to each special symbol or ordinary symbol. In each of these areas, various counter values (for example, the first winning opening 64 or the first right winning opening 641, the second winning opening 640, and the through gate 67) are entered according to the timing of entering the ball. The first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 39).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored. On the other hand, at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 640, it is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table If it matches the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of each special symbol. Also, the first random number table 202a has a high probability for high probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol for the low probability of the special symbol (period of the low probability state of the special symbol) and the low probability It includes two types of judgment values for the period of high probability state of special symbol). That is, the number of jackpot random numbers included in the table is different in each state. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 Are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, it is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 640.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is the first winning opening 64, the first right winning opening 641 or the second winning It is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203 at the timing when the mouth 640 is won.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is not a random number to be a big hit of the special symbol, that is, special If it is a random number which becomes the gap of the symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the gap of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a specific display mode at the time of the big hit It becomes an aspect.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that a common various counter value was selected about the random selection | lottery of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol, but 1st special symbol (1st lottery game) and 2nd special With the symbols (the second lottery game), set the dedicated counters for each, and update the different values of the counters for the first special symbol and the second special symbol with different values, and update with different values. Naturally, it may be configured by the counter value to be calculated.

  In this way, by configuring, even when the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to acquire counter values of different values, It is possible to suppress a failure that the fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the judgment result of success or failure are synchronized.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to suppress the problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized, and various effects. It can be performed. Further, storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM with a small storage area or the like) can be made.

  Here, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "0" is the first random number table 202a for the low probability. (See FIG. 12A). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/400".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value “0 to 9” is the first random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 12 (a )) Is stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/40".

  Also, in the first special symbol, there is no random value at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, there are 398 random numbers that become small hits when the probability is low, and the random numbers “1 to 398” are stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) There is. Thus, when the second special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of small random numbers is 398, so the probability of the second special symbol being small is "398/400". It becomes. In addition, at the time of the high probability of the second special symbol, there are 388 random numbers that will be small hits of the second special symbol, the random value "10 to 398" is the first hit random number table 202a (Figure 12 (a) Is stored in Thus, when there is a high probability of the second special symbol, the total number of random numbers is 400, the total number of small random numbers is 388, so the probability of becoming a small symbol of the second special symbol is "388/400" It becomes. In addition, although it was comprised so that the table (1st random number table 202a) of 1 may be used in this embodiment, it is not restricted to this, The table for the 1st special symbol, the table for 2nd special symbols, low probability The time table may be divided into tables for high probability times, etc., and used appropriately.

  In addition, the probability of becoming a jackpot and the probability of becoming a jackpot in the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not limited to those described above. For example, a small random number may be provided in the first special symbol (i.e. may be small), and a small random number in the second special symbol may be small (e.g. It may be reduced to 100).

  Furthermore, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and provided in the ROM 202 with the value of the first collision type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12B). As shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the first special symbol is a big hit, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 49” in the first hit type counter C2 is “big hit A The jackpot type when the random number value is “50 to 99” is “big hit B (16R hour shorts hit jackpot (power support 100 times))”.

  On the other hand, the jackpot type of the second special symbol is determined according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 (see S806 in FIG. 30). Specifically, when the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, if the value of the first type counter C2 is "0 to 49", it becomes "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until the power support next time))" If the random number value is "50 to 99", "big hit B (16R hour-time short and big hit (power support 100 times))" is obtained (see FIG. 12 (b)).

  In "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (up to the next time electric support))" or "big hit B (16 R time short big hit (power support 100 times))", the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated 16 times (16 rounds) As a result, the player is paid out a larger number of winning balls than usual as a game value (game value). Therefore, when the variable display based on "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (up to next time power supply)) or" big hit B (16R hourly short hit (power supply 100 times)) "is performed, the effect change processing (figure 47), a hit battle rendition is displayed to indicate that the player is in an advantageous state (big hit) (see FIG. 15 (b)).

  In addition, in the "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (power support until the next time))", since the probability variation gaming state is granted after the jackpot game, a probability variation per battle to suggest that a probability variation gaming state is awarded The effect is displayed, and in "big hit B (16 R time short hit (power support 100 times))", since the short time gaming state is granted after the big hit game, to suggest that the time saving gaming state is a big win A short-time battle effect is displayed. The same effect is displayed in the first half portion of the effect between the probability variation per capita battle effect and the hourly impact battle effect. Thereby, the battle is whether it is a probability variation per capita production (jackpot A (16R probability variant jackpot (until support next time))) or a battle performance per round (time per capita B (16R hour junior college per capita (power support 100 times))) It can be made unidentifiable until the second half of the presentation. As a result, since the player can be kept interested until the second half of the battle production, the player's interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to display an effect capable of discriminating "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (up to the next time electric support))" and "big hit B (16R hourly short big hit (power support 100 times))". However, it is not limited to this, it is difficult to determine which jackpot of "jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (up to the next time electricity support))" or "jackpot B (shortage jackpot at 16R hour (power supply 100 times))" Or, it may not be possible). This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to determine whether the gaming state has become the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, since the player continues the game with an expectation that the gaming state may be a probability change gaming state that is more advantageous than the short game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, when the gaming state is a short time gaming state, if the value of the first type counter C2 is "0 to 49", it will be "big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (up to the next time power supply))", random number value If it is "50-99", it will become "big hit D (2R hour short-time big hit (power support 100 times))" (refer FIG.12 (b)). In the "big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (up to the next time electric support))" or "big hit D (2R time shorts big hit (power support 100 times))", since the probability change gaming state is granted after the big hit game, the gaming state is time saving The promotion rank-up effect for suggesting that it is a jackpot to shift from the state to the probability change gaming state is displayed, and in "big hit B (16R time junior high jackpot (power support 100 times))", the time saving gaming state is after the jackpot game Since it is awarded again (superimposed), an extra rank-up effect is displayed to indicate that the short game state is a jackpot to be re-imposed (superimposed) (see FIG. 15B).

  In the promotion rank-up effect and the additional rank-up effect, the same effect is displayed in the first half of the effect. In this way, whether it is promoted rank-up effect (big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until support next time))) or additional rank-up effect (big hit D (2R hour junior high hit (power support 100 times)), rank It can be made unidentifiable until the second half of the up production. As a result, since the player can be kept interested until the second half of the rank-up effect, it is possible to improve the player's interest. Further, by displaying the promoted rank-up effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the fact that the subsequent gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. Furthermore, by displaying the additional rank-up effect, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with the fact that the short time game state is given 100 times again.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to display an effect capable of discriminating "big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (up to next time electric support))" and "big hit D (2R hourly short big hit (power support 100 times))". But it is not limited to this, it is difficult to determine which jackpot of "big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (up to next time electric support)) or" big hit D (2R hourly short jackpot (power support 100 times)) " Or, it may not be possible). This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to determine whether the gaming state has become either the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit game. As a result, since the player continues the game with an expectation that the gaming state may be a probability change gaming state that is more advantageous than the short game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, if the value of the first type counter C2 is "0 to 49", it becomes "big hit E (2R probability variation present time non-stop hit (without power support))", If the random number value is "50 to 99", "big hit F (2R normal big hit (without power support))" is obtained (see FIG. 12 (b)).

  Although the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed twice (two rounds), the time when the specific winning opening 65a is in the open state is short (0.5 seconds), and the player has a valuable gaming value (game Value is not given (or difficult to do). Therefore, when the variable display based on "big hit E (2R probability variation present time non hit big hit (without power support))" or "big hit F (2R normal big hit (without power support))" is executed, skip production is displayed (See FIG. 15 (b)). This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the player has become a "big hit E (2R probability variation present time non jackpot (without power support))" or "big hit F (2R usually big hit (without power support))" (or Can not do). As a result, although the probability change gaming state is awarded after execution of the jackpot game based on "big hit E (2R probability variation present time no loss jackpot (no electricity support))", it is known that the probability change gaming state is granted to the player It can be difficult (or impossible) to recognize.

  Here, it is the second winning opening 640 in the normal gaming state that "the jackpot E (2R probability variation time short non-hit jackpot (without electricity support))" or "jackpot F (2R normal jackpot (without electricity support))" It is a case where a game ball enters a ball and becomes a big hit. In the present embodiment, it is configured that entering the gaming ball into the second winning opening 640 (to execute the lottery of the second special symbol) is easy by pressing the skip switch 51c. In this case, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it can be said that the condition in which the jackpot advantageous to the player is selected is a condition extremely advantageous to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, with regard to the normal gaming state, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the game value (game value) is not given (or is difficult to be) the jackpot ("big hit E (2R probability variation time short break hit (No power support)) and "big hit F (2R normal big hit (no power support)))" are selected.

  In this way, the gaming value (gaming value) obtained by performing the drawing of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state (pressing the skip switch 51c and causing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640) is It can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is not too advantageous for the player.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol became "big hit E (2R probability variation with time short non-hit hit (without power support))" or "big hit F (2R normal hit (without power support))" In the case, the skip effect (see FIG. 6B), which is the same effect as the case of the small winning, is displayed (see FIG. 15B).

  As a result, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit E (2R probability variation present time non hit hit (no electricity support))" and the probability variation gaming state is given after the display of the skip effect, the player wins the big hit E (2R probability variation present time non-zero hit (without electricity support)), jackpot F (2R normal jackpot (without electricity support)), it is possible to determine whether the skip effect was performed based on which of the small win results Because it is impossible (or difficult), it can not be determined (or difficult) that the probability variation gaming state has been granted. As a result, in the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit E (2R probability variation with time short non-hit jackpot (without electricity support))", expecting that a probability variation gaming state is provided, the second prize A game (illegal game) for entering the mouth 640 can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above, You may make it a probability variation gaming state not be provided in the lottery result of a 2nd special symbol. In addition, in the lottery results of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is not given a probability variation gaming state, in the lottery results of the second special symbol in the time reduction gaming state or probability variation gaming state is to be granted a probability variation gaming state May be In this case, the gaming board 13 is provided with an operating opening (so-called V winning opening) in which the probability variation gaming state is given based on the passage of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball passes through the operating opening (so-called V winning opening) It is sufficient to provide a restricting member capable of controlling whether or not to do that based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of detachment, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the first right winning opening 641. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, a range of random number values set for each type of stoppage of deviation Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 0. A table for low probability time as narrow as 79 is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "complete out". Further, in the low probability state, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, and therefore, it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first winning opening 64 or the first right winning opening 641, and by the third symbol display device 81 It becomes easy for the variable display to be continued. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the fluctuation time refers to the time from when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started to when the symbol is stopped and displayed and the symbol is determined. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, if the symbol is stopped and displayed for only 0.4 seconds and the symbol is determined, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds) It is written that Based on this fluctuation time, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 12 to 14) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. (See FIG. 11A).

  Here, the fluctuation pattern table 202 d will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the variation pattern table 202d is a first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 that defines the variation based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641; A special pattern 2 special symbol variation pattern table 202d2 is set which defines the variation based on entering the second winning opening 640.

  First, the details of the first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13A, the first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 is a variation pattern table 202d1a (see FIG. 13B) for the special figure 1 big hit, and the variation for the special figure 1 (normal) variation At least a pattern table 202d1b (see FIG. 13 (c)) and a special pattern 1 deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d1c (see FIG. 13 (d)) are set. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the fluctuation pattern table etc. in time saving game state etc. are set besides this.

  First, with reference to FIG. 13 (b), the special pattern 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1a will be described. FIG. 13B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1a. The special pattern 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d1a is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

  Specifically, “0 to 50” is the variation pattern of various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “51 to 179” is the variety of special reach (90 seconds) for the variation patterns of various types of super reach (60 seconds). For the fluctuation pattern of), "180 to 198" are respectively set as the determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win, a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 being acquired is set Is selected from the variation pattern table 202d1a for the special figure 1 jackpot.

  FIG. 13C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of (special) fluctuation pattern table 202d1b for removing from the special view 1. The special pattern 1 off (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1b is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out. When the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out (non reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table not shown It is determined by the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set.

  Here, if the variation pattern type is completely out of the range, a relatively short variation (7 seconds) of variation time and a long variation (10 seconds) of variation time are set. “0 to 98” is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  In addition, for outreach, “0 to 149” for various outreach normal reach (30 seconds), “150 to 197” for outfall super reach (60 seconds), outlier special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  Thus, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the type of stop, and based on the value of the change type selection counter CS1, the special drawing (1) A fluctuation pattern is selected from the (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1b.

  FIG. 13D is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special pattern 1 deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d1c. This special figure 1 off (probable change) change pattern table 202d1c is a data table for selecting the change pattern of the first special symbol to be released when the game state is the probability change game state. In the special pattern 1 deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d1c, the value of the set fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is different from the special drawing 1 deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1b described above.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete removal is determined If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the outreach is determined.

  As described above, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation at the time of the definite change becomes long and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, the game is postponed during the probability change gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels bored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the details of the special pattern variation pattern table 202d2 for special symbol 2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the special pattern 2 special symbol variation pattern table 202d2 includes a special pattern 2 big hit variation pattern table 202d2a (see FIG. 14 (b)) and a special figure 2 small hit variation pattern. At least a table 202d2b (see FIG. 14C) and a special pattern 2 deviation pattern table 202d2c (see FIG. 14D) are set.

  First, with reference to FIG. 14 (b), the special view 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202 d 2 a will be described. FIG. 14B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202d2a. The special pattern 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202d2a is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit.

  As the variation pattern of the jackpot in the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, variation A (30 seconds) is set, and in the probability variation gaming state regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), Fluctuation A (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, fluctuation B (10 seconds) is set as a fluctuation pattern in the time saving gaming state, and in the time shortening gaming state, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), fluctuation B (10 Seconds) is selected. Furthermore, as the fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state, fluctuation C (0.5 seconds) is set, and in the normal gaming state, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), fluctuation C (0.5 seconds) is selected.

  Specifically, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 corresponds to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 and the gaming state when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit The fluctuation pattern in which the judgment value is set is selected from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d2a.

  Although the details will be described later, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, a probability variation or a time-shortening battle effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since this probability change or time-shortening battle effect is a 30-second effect, it is possible to match the timing at which the fluctuation A (30 seconds) ends with the end timing of the probability change or time-shortening battle effect (30 seconds).

  Further, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the short time game state, promotion or additional rank-up effect is executed (see FIG. 15B). This promotion or additional rank-up effect is a 12-second effect. When the second special symbol is a big hit in the short time game state, a big hit of 2 rounds (big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (up to the next charge)) or big hit D (2R time short hit (power support 100 times)) is The selected jackpot game time is 2 seconds (0.5 seconds for the opening time of the specified winning combination and 0.5 seconds for the closing time × 2 times). Therefore, the timing (12 seconds in total) when fluctuation B (10 seconds) ends and the big hit game (2 seconds) after that can be matched with the end timing (12 seconds) of promotion or additional rank-up effect .

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, the skip effect is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). This skip effect is an effect of 2.5 seconds. If the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, the jackpot of two rounds ("big hit E (2R probability variation time with short break no hit (no power support))" or "big hit F (2R normal big hit (without power support) ))) Is selected, the gaming time of the jackpot game is 2 seconds (0.5 seconds opening time of the specified winning combination and 0.5 seconds closing time × 2 times). Therefore, make the timing (total 2.5 seconds) when fluctuation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the big hit game (2 seconds) after that agree with the end timing (2.5 seconds) of the skip effect. Can. This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the jackpot game has been executed, and it is difficult to recognize that the lottery result based on the second special symbol has become the jackpot (or, Can not do).

  FIG. 14C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hitting variation pattern table 202d 2 b. The special pattern 2 small hitting variation pattern table 202d2b is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hitting. As the variation pattern of the small hitting, only variation C (0.5 seconds) is set in any gaming state. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

  In the special figure 2 small hitting variation pattern table 202d2b, only the variation C (0.5 seconds) is set as the small hitting variation pattern, regardless of the gaming state and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (value Is from 0 to 198), a variation C (0.5 seconds) is selected.

  Specifically, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the determination value corresponding to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is set The variation pattern being selected is selected from the small hitting variation pattern table 202d2b.

  Here, the skip effect is 2.5 seconds. If the second special symbol is a small hit, a small hit game of 2 rounds is executed, and the small hit game playing time is 2 seconds (specific winning opening open time 0.5 seconds and closed time 0.5 It has become seconds × 2). Therefore, the timing (total 2.5 seconds) at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent small hitting game (2 seconds) ends matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds) be able to.

  FIG. 14D is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special pattern 2 deviation pattern table 202d2c. The special pattern 2 off variation pattern table 202d2c is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out.

  As the variation pattern of the game state in the probability variation gaming state, variation A (30 seconds) is set, and in the probability variation gaming state regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), Fluctuation A (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, fluctuation B (10 seconds) is set as a fluctuation pattern in the time saving gaming state, and in the time shortening gaming state, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198), fluctuation B (10 Seconds) is selected. Furthermore, fluctuation A (30 seconds) is set as a fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state, fluctuation A (30 seconds) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (when the value is 0 to 198). Seconds) is selected.

  Specifically, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol falls out, the MPU 201 corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the gaming state acquired. The fluctuation pattern in which the judgment value is set is selected from the deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d2c.

  Although the details will be described later, when the second special symbol is detached in the probability variation gaming state, an off battle effect is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). Since this out-of-battle effect is a 30-second effect, it is possible to match the timing when the fluctuation A (30 seconds) ends with the end timing of the out-of-battle effect (30 seconds).

  In addition, when the variation of the out-of-round based on the first special symbol is executed, the out-of-round battle effect is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out-of-line. In this case, if the variation of the out-of-round based on the first special symbol is stopped during the display of the out-of-round battle effect, the variation of the first special symbol based on the next hold is started while continuing the out-of-out battle effect. On the other hand, if the variation of the outlier based on the first special symbol is continuously executed even at the end of the battle effect, the variation display of the outlier based on the first special symbol after ending the out-of-out battle effect Will be executed for the remaining time. In addition, it is not restricted to this, it may be made to extend the out-of-round battle effect by the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the out-of-focus based on the first special symbol, or an effect may be separately performed.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, periodically, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 12 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table 202c is for high probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol), and high probability (normal symbol) with high probability of being hit of normal symbol from low probability. The number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  When the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240 while the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 24. Therefore, the probability of becoming a big symbol of a normal symbol is "1/10".

  When the ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed, and the first right winning opening 641 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the first right winning opening 641 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240 while the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  If the ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed, and the first right winning opening 641 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of fluctuation indication becomes very short with “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, furthermore, the release of the right 1st winning opening 641 Since the period is very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the right first winning hole 641. It should be noted that a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the right first prize hole 641 is opened for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol comes into contact. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 39).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first collision type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. The contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 39), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 38) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g. Normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, short time counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, special figure 1 big hit flag 203o, special figure 2 big hit flag 203p, special figure 2 small hit flag 203r, time short flag 203s , And other memory areas 203z at least.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has various counter values acquired based on winning in the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). It is a storage area for storing.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and the first special symbol is the first special symbol when the variable display is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the storage area is a storage area where the various counter values are shifted and stored.

  The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 This is a storage area in which various acquired counter values are directly stored. Therefore, the second special symbol is not held on the basis of winning.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d are acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 10) upon detection of start winning. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the MPU 201 detects from the counter buffer each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second winning opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer and stored directly in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the above-described first to execute processing such as a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Among the data corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to one starting winning combination, this first special symbol holding ball Shift to the execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is to the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 which is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display effect (the fluctuation display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1614 in FIG. 38) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting winning combination is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four. Then, each time the variable display effect is executed, the counter of the special symbol corresponding to the executed effect is decremented by one.

  In addition, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the holding ball number of the first special symbol) is based on the game ball having won in the first winning opening 64 or the first right winning opening 641. When the counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the starting winning combination is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one. It is.

  If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are respectively stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 1 Data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 24, At S206), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a fluctuation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation display effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The game ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) which is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). The number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the variable display effect (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 83) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on Is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203 g is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal winning opening 67. By the initial setting process (S1614 in FIG. 38) of the RAM 203 after power on, zero is set as an initial value. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value 4 (see FIG. 36, S1404). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 35, S1309).

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is a storage area in which the second collision random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 10) is detected along with the detection of the start winning to the normal winning opening 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 detects that the ball has passed the normal winning opening 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the second counter random number counter C4 The value is acquired and stored in the second hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding ball is sequentially stored in the order in which the data is available from among the holding areas where the data is available, from the earliest holding area to be digested. Ru.

  In addition, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation indication production of normal design on the basis of starting winning a prize, normal counter design sphere execution area 203i, each counter value is housed, the winning lottery of the normal design and the 1st It is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute processing such as the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83, the above-mentioned normal symbol hold Of the data corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the ball storage area 203h (the value of the second random number counter C4), the data corresponding to one starting winning combination is shifted to this normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i . Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The time saving counter 203k is a counter area where the time saving count 100 is set after the 16R time short jackpot game is executed. When the time saving number is set, the lottery of the normal symbol is executed based on the second random number table for high probability time until the time saving number is set to 0. In addition, when the symbol “○” indicating the hit of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the normal motorized role 641a opens for a longer opening time (1s in this embodiment) than the normal gaming state. The operation is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time saving gaming state.

  The hour reduction counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops fluctuating display, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203k becomes 0, it shifts from the time reduction gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the ordinary symbol When the second random number table 202c for the low probability time of the random number counter 202c is set, and the symbol "○" indicating a normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the open time is 0.2 s In the setting of the number of times of opening, the blade of the normal electric power source 641a is opened.

  The probability change flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 16R probability variation big hit game is won, and when the 16R probability variation big hit game is executed, a flag that is set on based on the end of the big hit game It is. On the other hand, when the probability change flag 203m is set to ON, and stopped and displayed with symbols (all types) indicating a jackpot by the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is set to OFF, and after the jackpot game, that jackpot game Set to on according to the jackpot type. Specifically, if it is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (up to the next charge), jackpot C (2R probability variation hit (up to the next dose support)), jackpot E (2R probability variation timed short non-stop hit (without electricity support)) Is set to on.

  The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is a hit based on winning in the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. It is a flag set to In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  Special figure 2 big hit flag 203p is the flag which is set on, when it is decided, that it is decided that the value of the 1st random number counter C1 which is acquired on the basis of winning in 2nd winning a prize mouth 640 is a hit. . In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The special figure 2 small hitting flag 203r is a flag which shows that it is judged that the hitting judgment of the 2nd special symbol is a small hitting. The special figure 2 small hitting flag 203r is set to ON when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hitting in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 30) described later (see FIG. 30). See S808 in FIG. 30). Then, it is referred to in the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29), and is set to off at the timing when the small hit game ends in the small hit control process of the main process (see FIG. 39) (see S1705 in FIG. 39). .

  When the special figure 2 big hit flag 203p or the special figure 2 small hit flag 203r mentioned above is on, it is the case that the big hit game or the small hit game of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of the first special symbol If it is being executed, the change is stopped (S706 in FIG. 29). Here, the jackpot of the first random number table 202a (or the jackpot) so that the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn on the basis of entering the second winning opening 640 will be a big hit or a small hit with high probability. ) A judgment value is set (see FIG. 12 (a)). Thereby, based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640, it is possible to stop the variation of the first special symbol.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to enter the second winning opening 640 when the non-electric role object 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in the open state. When the non-motor-operated combination 640a is in the open state, the indication-during-pressing effect at the time of opening (see FIG. 6A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The player can be urged to press the skip button 51 c by the opening depression suggestion effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, among the game balls launched based on pressing the skip switch 51c, the game balls are placed at positions where the game balls that did not enter the second winning opening 640 are likely to enter. An operation port 670 is provided to operate the non-motor-operated part 640a to the open state based on the ball. Then, when the non-electric role thing 640a is in a closed state, a pressing indication effect at the time of closing (see FIG. 6A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this closing time suggestive effect, the player is urged to press the skip button 51c to urge the operation port 670 to fire the gaming ball (ie, the non-electric role object 640a is opened). Can)

  When the skip button 51 c is pressed, the gaming ball fired by the launch control device 112 is fired to the second winning opening 640. When the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, as described above, the change of the first special symbol is stopped and the skip effect that suggests that the change of the first special symbol is skipped (FIG. 6 (b ) Or battle rendition (see FIG. 7A) is displayed. This makes it possible to give the player an impression as if the effect was changed based on the depression of the skip button 51c.

  Furthermore, on the front side of the second winning opening 640, a front cover member 600 that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the inside is disposed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game ball fired upon pressing the skip button 51c enters the second winning opening 640. As a result, based on having won the second winning opening 640, the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, and the skip effect (see FIG. 6 (b)) or the battle effect (see FIG. 7 (a)) Although displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the effect was changed based on the depression of the skip button 51c.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit game or small hit game of the second special symbol is executed (when the big hit or small hit is displayed as a lottery result of the second special symbol), the variation of the first special symbol Although the display is configured to be forcibly stopped (forced stop), the present invention is not limited thereto. Even when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be stopped. When the jackpot game or small hit game of the first special symbol is executed (when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit or small hit), the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. (Forced stop) may be configured.

  In addition, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, when the fluctuation display is started where the lottery result of the second special symbol is the big hit or the small hit, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in fluctuation is forced to be stopped You may configure it. Thus, the timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped can be advanced, and the player can be more strongly given the impression that the variable display has been skipped.

  Furthermore, skip rendering may be performed (displayed) so as to give an impression as if the variation of the first special symbol has been skipped by the effect display without performing the forced stop described above. For example, the variation of the first special symbol may be changed to a mode in which it is difficult (or impossible) to visually recognize, and the characters "skip!" May be displayed. In addition, during the variation of the first special symbol, it may be possible to change the mode of the effect being displayed based on the depression of the skip switch 51 c or the entering of the second winning opening 640. As a result, the player can select a desired effect mode by pressing the skip switch 51, and the player's interest can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a small hit is not set as the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a small hit may be set as the lottery result of the first special symbol. In this case, the special figure 1 small hitting flag which is the flag which shows that it is judged that the hitting judgment of the first special symbol is the small hitting is provided, and it is set and referred in the same way as the special figure 2 small hitting flag do it. Furthermore, the small symbol (or the big hit) is not set as the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped only when the lottery result of the second special symbol is the big hit (or the small hit). You may do so.

  Also, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (or small hit), the variation display of the other special symbol is stopped, but the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (or a big hit) When it becomes, it is possible not to stop the fluctuation display of the other special symbol. Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot (or jackpot), the variation display of the other special symbol may be stopped.

  The time saving flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is the time saving game state. The short time flag 203s indicates that the gaming state is the short time gaming state when it is on, and indicates that the gaming state is not the short time gaming state when it is off. The short time flag 203s is determined to be a probability variation jackpot ending at the start timing of ending effect by the jackpot control process (see FIG. 40) described later (S1813 in FIG. 40: Yes), and the jackpot E (2R probability variation) When it is not set (S1815 in FIG. 40: No), it is set to ON, and it is determined that it is a definite variation jackpot and a non-timepiece jackpot ending (ie, a normal jackpot ending). (S1817 in FIG. 40: No) is set to off.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 at least stores a variation pattern table 222a and an effect change selection table 222b.

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is already known and will be briefly described. However, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control device 113 roughly displays the fluctuation contents indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Further detailed fluctuation content is determined from the fluctuation pattern table 222a from (the fluctuation time, the fluctuation type (reach, outlier, etc.)). Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode is determined from among a plurality of types by lottery.

  When the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 when the effect change selection table 222 b displays a suggested effect that suggests pressing of the skip switch 51 c during a change based on the removal of the first special symbol ( That is, it is a table for selecting an effect to be displayed (changed) when the change based on the second special symbol is executed. The effect change selection table 222b is referred to in effect change processing (see FIG. 47) described later, and effects are selected in accordance with the lottery result of the second special symbol and the game state.

  Here, the details of the effect change selection table will be described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until the next charge support))" probability variation winning battle effect (30 seconds) is selected, " If the jackpot B (16R time junior high jackpot (power support 100 times)) "is selected the battle production (30 seconds) per hour short, if the" small hit "skip production (2.5 seconds) is selected," off If it is ", out of battle production (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until the charge support next time))", "big hit D (2R time junior high hit (power support 100 times )), "Big hit E (2R probability variation with no short hit (without charge support))" or "big hit F (2R normal hit (without charge support))" (see FIG. 12 (b)).

  In addition, if the gaming state is a short time gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until the next charge)) probability variation rank up effect (12 seconds) is selected If it is "big hit D (2R hour shorts big hit (power support 100 times))", the additional rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected, and if "small hit", the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected If it is "off", an off rank up effect (12 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is a short time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until the power support next time))", "big hit B (16R time short hit (power support 100 times) )), "Big hit E (2R probability variation with no short hit (without charge support))" or "big hit F (2R normal hit (without charge support))" (see FIG. 12 (b)).

  In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol, "big hit E (2R probability variation with time short non-hit jackpot (without power support))", "big hit F (2R normal jackpot (power support If there is no)) or "small hit", skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected, and if it is "off", an off battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is a short time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until the power support next time))", "big hit B (16R time short hit (power support 100 times) )), "Large C (2R probability variation big (during power support until next time))" or "Larly hit D (2R time short-dense large power (100 times power support))" (see FIG. 12 (b)).

  As described above, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, a probability variation or a time-shortening battle effect (30 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since the fluctuation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state is fluctuation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (b)), the timing at which the fluctuation A (30 seconds) ends It is possible to coincide with the end timing of the battle variation (30 seconds) per a definite variation or a short time.

  Also, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state is a variation C (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (c)), the small hitting game playing time is 2 seconds (The opening time of the specified winning opening 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing (total 2.5 seconds) at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent small hitting game (2 seconds) ends matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds) be able to. Since this skip effect is displayed until the end timing of the small hitting game, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the small hitting has occurred and that the small hitting game has been executed. By displaying the skip effect, the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, and the player is given the impression that the variation based on the suspension of the next first special symbol is started (skipped) to the player. Can.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol is out in the probability variation gaming state, out of step battle effect (30 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is detached in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (d)). Therefore, the timing at which the change A (30 seconds) ends can be matched with the end timing of the out-of-order battle effect (30 seconds).

  Next, if the second special symbol is a big hit in the short time game state, promotion or additional rank-up effect (12 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a big hit in the short time game state is the change B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (b)), the playing time of the big hit game is 2 seconds (specific winning opening Open time 0.5 seconds and closed time 0.5 seconds × 2)). Therefore, the timing (12 seconds in total) when fluctuation B (10 seconds) ends and the big hit game (2 seconds) after that can be matched with the end timing (12 seconds) of promotion or additional rank-up effect .

  Also, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the time saving game state, skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, the end timing (total 2.5 seconds) of the small hitting game executed in the time saving gaming state The end timing is the same.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol is out in the time saving game state, out-of-rank rank-up effect (10 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is removed in the time saving game state is variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (d)). Therefore, the end timing of the fluctuation B (10 seconds) can be matched with the end timing of the out-of-rank rank effect (10 seconds).

  Here, the promotion or additional rank-up effect (12 seconds) and the out-of-order rank-up effect (10 seconds) have different presentation times, but the first half of each stage is the same stage, and the second half of the stage At (when 8 seconds have passed since the effect was displayed), it is possible to determine whether the rank-up effect is a promotion rank-up effect, an additional rank-up effect, or an out-of-rank effect. As a result, the player can be kept interested until the second half of the rank-up effect, so the player's interest can be improved.

  Then, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the timing at which the jackpot game is executed in the normal gaming state (total 2.5), as in the case where the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state And the end timing match. This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the jackpot game has been executed, and it is difficult to recognize that the lottery result based on the second special symbol has become the jackpot (or, Can not do).

  Further, also when the second special symbol is a small hit in the normal gaming state, the skip effect is similarly executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is a normal game, as in the case where the second special symbol is a big win in the normal gaming state, or the second special symbol is a small win in the probability variation gaming state or the short time gaming state. The end timing (total 2.5 seconds) of the small hitting game executed in the state and the end timing coincide with each other.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol falls out in the normal gaming state, an out-of-battle effect (30 seconds) is executed. The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is off in the normal gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore. The timing at which the change A (30 seconds) to be executed based on the second special symbol's end is completed can be matched with the end timing of the off battle presentation (30 seconds).

  In addition, when the variation of the out-of-round based on the first special symbol is executed, the out-of-round battle effect is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out-of-line. In this case, if the variation of the out-of-round based on the first special symbol is stopped during the display of the out-of-round battle effect, the variation of the first special symbol based on the next hold is started while continuing the out-of-out battle effect. On the other hand, if the variation of the outlier based on the first special symbol is continuously executed even at the end of the battle effect, the variation display of the outlier based on the first special symbol after ending the out-of-out battle effect Will be executed for the remaining time. In addition, it is not restricted to this, it may be made to extend the out-of-round battle effect by the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the out-of-focus based on the first special symbol, or an effect may be separately performed.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1, a first change start flag 223c1, a second change start flag 223c2, a first stop type selection flag 223d1, a second A stop type selection flag 223d2, an effect counter 223e, an indication effect flag 223f, an indication effect state storage area 223g, an effect change flag 223h, a pseudo effect change flag 223i, a gauge level 223j, a power off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223m are provided. It is done.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas) corresponding to each special symbol, and each of these areas is winning information The values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored respectively. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is, like the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, the first special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a fluctuation display (dynamic display) of a symbol and counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the fluctuation display effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  The first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 43, S2102). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 48, S2602).

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 43, S2106). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 48, S2606).

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 43, S2109). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 48, S2610).

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 43, S2109). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 48, S2610).

  The effect counter 223e is a 0 to 198 loop counter, and is updated in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed in the V interrupt process (FIG. 112) of the display control device 114. When the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received, the suggestion effect flag for executing the suggestion effect is set on based on the value of the effect counter 223e and the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received command (See S2105 in FIG. 43).

  When the main controller 110 detects a power-off, the power-off flag 223y sends a power-off command to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the audio lamp control unit 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y turns on. It is set, and the power-off process is executed (S2017 in FIG. 42). Then, in the startup process (FIG. 41) of the audio lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the power-off flag 223y is set off (FIG. 41). S1910).

  The suggested effect flag 223 f is a flag for determining whether or not to execute (display) various suggested effects (closed pressing suggestion effect, open pressing suggestion effect). The suggestion effect flag 223 f is referred to in a suggestion effect process (FIG. 49) described later (FIG. 49), and if it is on, various suggestion effects are executed (displayed) and if it is off, it is not executed (displayed). This suggestion effect flag 223 f is set to ON based on the extracted variation pattern and the effect counter when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (see S2104 in FIG. 43), and various indication effects are executed (displayed) It is set to off when the fluctuation being stopped is stopped (see S2118 in FIG. 43). Further, when the effect is changed by the effect generation process at the time of winning (FIG. 45) to be described later, since the execution (display) of various indication effects is ended, the indication effect flag 223f is set to OFF.

  The suggested effect state storage area 223g is an area set when various suggested effects are being executed, and it is used as a type of suggested effect currently being executed (displayed) (closed press suggested effect, open pressed suggested effect) It is an area in which a base value is stored. This indication effect state storage area 223g is referred to in the indication effect process (see FIG. 49) described later, and is for executing (displaying) various indication effects (closing depression indication effects upon closing, indication depression effects upon opening) When the various indication suggestive effect commands for various display modes are set, a value based on the type of the indicated suggestive effect (close indication suggestion effect at closing, indication indication at depression time open) is stored.

  The effect change flag 223h is a flag for determining whether or not the effect change process has been executed in the variable display being executed. If the effect change flag 223 h is on, it indicates that the effect change process has been executed in the variable display, and if off, it indicates that the effect change process is not executed in the variable display that is being executed. The effect change flag 223h is set to ON when the effect change process (see S2309 in FIG. 45) is executed in the prize effect change process (see FIG. 45). And, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol is received, that is, when the fluctuation display whose effect is changed by the effect change process (refer to FIG. 47) is stopped, the effect The change flag 223h is set to off.

  Although the details will be described later, when the effect change flag 223h is on, that is, when the effect is changed in the variable display under execution, the effect change process (see FIG. 45) at the time of winning is performed. The change (the pseudo effect change process and the effect change process) is not executed (see S2306: No in FIG. 45). Thereby, although the effect (battle effect or rank up effect) changed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46) is under execution (displayed), the effect change process (or the pseudo effect change process again) Can be suppressed, and it is possible to suppress that the effect is changed.

  The pseudo effect change flag 223i is a flag for determining whether or not the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46) has been executed in the variable display being executed. If the pseudo effect change flag 223h is on, the pseudo effect change process is executed in the variable display under execution, indicating that the effect has been changed, and if off, the pseudo effect change process is executed in the variable display under execution Indicates that the effect has not been changed. The pseudo effect change flag 223i is set to ON when the pseudo effect change process (see S2308 in FIG. 45) is executed in the prize effect change process (see FIG. 45). Then, when the opening command for executing (displaying) the opening effect of the big hit game is received, that is, the variable display in which the effect is changed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 47) is stopped, and the big hit game is started. When the false effect change flag 223h is turned off.

  Although the details will be described later, when the pseudo effect change flag 223i is on, that is, when the effect is changed in the changing display under execution, the effect at the time of winning effect change processing (see FIG. 45), The change of (pseudo effect change process and effect change process) is not executed (see S2306: No in FIG. 45). Thereby, although the effect (battle effect or rank-up effect) changed by the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46) is being executed (displayed), the pseudo effect change process (or effect change process again) Can be suppressed, and it is possible to suppress that the effect is changed.

  The gauge level 223 j is used to determine the mode of the gauge displayed at the center of the right side of the third symbol display device 81 (the width of the area where the gauge is lighted and displayed) in the closing effect (see FIG. 7B). This is an area for storing values. The value of this gauge level 223 j is set in the range of 0 to 5000. Specifically, when the gauge level 223 j is 0, the area in which the gauge is lit and displayed is also 0 (that is, only the gauge frame is displayed and the inside is not lit and displayed). When the gauge level 223 j is 2500, the width of the lighted display area of the gauge is half of the maximum width, and the area from the left end to the center of the gauge frame is lighted. When the gauge level 223 j is 5000, the width of the area displayed on the gauge is the maximum width, and all areas from the left end to the right end of the gauge frame are displayed on. As described above, according to the value of the gauge level 223 j, the width of the area to be lit and displayed starting from the left end of the gauge frame is determined.

  The other memory area 223 m is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing part of a boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 50) executed after the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 50) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 52B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power on fluctuation image area 235b, a third symbol area 235d, and a power on title image area 235f are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning opening 64, the first right winning opening 641 Alternatively, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image which displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by fluctuation effect when entering the second winning opening 640 is detected.

  When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 causes the character ROM 234 to turn on the main image at power on, the fluctuation image at power on, and the image data corresponding to the title image area 235 f at power on. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 so as to be transferred to 235a (see FIG. 65).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 18 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" on the display screen of the main image at power-on and at the bottom right of the screen, as shown in Fig. 18C. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 18 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of special symbol”, and when “out of special symbol” is shown in FIG. 18 (c) The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the range of the rear surface image and the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c among the rear surface image will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory view for explaining the range of the rear side image and the rear side image stored in the rear side image area 235c of the video RAM 235 for residence with respect to each rear side image, and FIG. 19 (b) is shown for the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage".

  Of the back faces A and B, the back face images corresponding to the back faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 19, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "image for scrolling") are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the back surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage is a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b Is stored in the rear image area 235c of

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ', and the position a to the position a including the initial position Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the player can press the frame button by the player. When the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed by the third symbol by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 It can be displayed on the device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone is not changed with the passage of time. It is possible to display et al. Further, as for the back surface B, only the image data corresponding to the partial image range is stored, so that the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Note that on the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 53) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball to the first winning opening 64, the right first winning opening 641 or the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37, although the fluctuation effect is started, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started in the three symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Next, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233 j, a drawing target buffer flag 233 k, and other storage areas 223 z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while if the stop type of the change effect is a big hit, The stop symbol indicating the type of the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko game machine 10 has shifted to the special game state from now on and the ball entry restricting plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 which is normally closed is repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and informs the player of the game value (short period of time of the normal symbol) to be given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol being held. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the short term of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short term of the normal symbol. Since the longer the short term of the normal symbol, the more chances of the ball passing through the through gate 67, the more chances of the normal symbol drawing will be made, and the more chances for the normal symbol to hit. Therefore, since the chance of the electric symbol being released is increased as it becomes a big hit of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the right first winning opening 641, and the lottery of the special symbol can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short term of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  Also, since the first right winning opening 641 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball enters the ball, the electric jackpot is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the first right When it becomes easy to enter the winning opening 641, the number of winning balls increases. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the special symbol being held will be a big hit of the special symbol in the ending effect, the player can select the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol being held. Since it can be recognized that the player wins the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the jackpot of the special symbol will surely be made. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates either of the back surfaces A, B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “in the town stage” or “empty stage”), or a back surface different from the back surfaces A, B Information specifying whether to display an image is described. Further, in the case of specifying to display a rear surface image different from the rear surfaces A and B, the rear surface type also describes information specifying which rear surface image to display.

  When it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 20) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 21 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 21).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 21, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2805 in FIG. 50). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 63 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3101 in FIG. 52B), When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 52 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 52B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 52 (b) (see S3109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 53 to 59) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3105 in FIG. 52B), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 63 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later (see FIG. 22) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process of one frame (FIG. 52 (b In step S3103), the pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 60) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 22), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 22, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 52 (b Every time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4307 in FIG. 60). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  For all stored sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to that sprite in the image storage area 236a of the ordinary video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by the initial setting process (see S 2802 in FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233 j is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 64). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 64). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4902 in FIG. 65).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 52B) is performed, the process is performed (see S4902 of FIG. 65).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The other storage area 233z has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the audio lamp control device 113 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 53) of the display control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

<About control processing of main controller>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start process (FIG. 38) activated with power on and a main process (FIG. 39) executed after the start process (2 in this embodiment). There are timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) activated at millisecond intervals (FIG. 23) and NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 37) activated by the input of power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The loading process (FIG. 23) and the NMI interruption process (FIG. 37) will be described, and then the start-up process (FIG. 38) and the main process (FIG. 39) will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). After that, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, the right first winning opening 641 or the second winning opening 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 to 34.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the through gate accompanying passing of the ball in the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 Pass processing is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended.

  The launch control process (S108) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and the ball is stopped under the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the firing of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on. In the present embodiment, when the skip switch 51c provided on the operation handle 51 is pressed, the resistor used for setting the emission intensity of the emission control device 112 is changed, and the emission is released from the emission solenoid 142. The launch intensity of the gaming ball is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a launch control device 112 capable of changing the launch intensity of the launch solenoid based on a signal input from the main control unit 110 is provided, and in the launch control process (S108) A signal indicating the emission intensity may be transmitted to the emission control device 112 based on the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. As a result, since the game machine can change the emission intensity according to the operation of the skip switch 51c as described above without providing two types of resistors, the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104) performs various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by predetermined control In the aspect, the variable display can be controlled at the same time by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, or the control for stopping display in the display mode indicating the determination result is executed. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104) will be described below.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104), it is first determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S204). The details of the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, but if the second special symbol is not a hit, the first special symbol holding ball number storage area 203a pending data (various counters If the value is stored, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the pending data are executed. On the other hand, when the second special symbol is a hit, the above-described process is not performed, and the variable display is not started. This is to prevent the player from being confused by the occurrence of a jackpot at the same time with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) or the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The details of the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). The second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, but if the first special symbol is not hit, as in the first special symbol variation start process (S203), the second special symbol variation start process If reserve data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol reserve number-of-balls storage area 203a, the jackpot determination based on the reserve data and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a hit, the above-described process is not performed, and the variable display is not started. In addition, when it is determined in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol that it is a jackpot or a small hit, the first special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol variation start process (S203) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter is obtained (S301), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 0 It is determined whether it is larger (S302).

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), the holding ball for which the variable display in the first special symbol has not been executed is Because the new fluctuation is not started, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e ( N1) is decremented by 1 (S303). Then, the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is shifted in order toward the execution area (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  When the process of S304 is finished, it is determined whether or not the variation based on the jackpot or the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed (S305). In the process of S305, when it is determined that the variation based on the jackpot or small hit of the second special symbol is not being executed (S305: No), the lottery result based on the holding ball of the first special symbol to start the variation is determined The first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306), and the process proceeds to S307. The details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the change based on the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed (S305: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a deviation (S308) ), Set the out-of-pattern of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device (S309), and shift to the processing of S307. By the processing of S308 and S309, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from becoming a big hit (or small hit) during the fluctuation in which the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit. As a result, by the second special symbol and the first special symbol simultaneously becoming a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to suppress a defect that the player is confused.

  When the processing of S306 or S309 is finished, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing for selecting and setting the variation pattern based on the determination result of the first special symbol is executed (S307), and this processing is ended. The details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thus, when the variation based on the big hit or small hit of the second special symbol is being executed, the drawing of the first special symbol executed during that time is set as all out, and the variation based on the out is executed. become. In addition, although it is not restricted to this, while the change based on the big hit or the small hit of the 2nd special symbol is under execution, the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol is executed in the form of the out, but the lottery result of the 1st special symbol is It may be stored (stored). Then, the big hit game or the small hit game may be started based on the lottery result stored (stored) after the end of the second special symbol of the big hit game or the small hit game. Furthermore, when the jackpot game is started based on the lottery result stored (stored) after the end of the jackpot game of the first special symbol, such an effect as if the jackpot game is continuing is executed You may

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 25, S203) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 26, S306), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401), and the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (probability variation) Medium) is determined (S402). Whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or not is determined depending on whether the probability change flag 203m is set to on. If it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is on (that is, the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (during a definite change)) (S402: Yes), based on the first random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the large hitting random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is off (that is, the gaming state is low probability gaming state (not positive variation)) (S402: No), in the first random number table 202a for low probability time Based on the determination, it is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  In the process of S405, it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S405). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), a big hit symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, and the special figure 1 big hit The flag 203o is set on (S406). Thereby, in the first symbol display device 37, a symbol based on the value of the first type counter C2 (for example, "7" for 16R probability variation jackpot) is set in the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b. Ru.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is off (S405: No), the first symbol display device 37 is detached and the symbol is set (S407). In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “−” indicating detachment is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37 b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be displayed in a stopped state when the variable display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 25, S203), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307). This first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307), each counter the variation pattern based on the result of the determination based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c It is a process for selecting based on a value.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol acquired in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) is a jackpot (S501) . In the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined from the first special symbol variation pattern table 202d1 (S502) . When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S502, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  For example, as a variation pattern for outliers, "complete outliers", "outlier normal reach", "outperity super reach", and "outside special reach" are defined, and as a variation pattern for jackpots, "normal reach", Various types of "Super Reach" and "Special Reach" are defined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol is out (S501: No), the variation pattern at the time of out is determined (S503). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S502, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  Here, various types of "per-super reach" and "disappeared super reach" include "super reach A", "super reach B" and other super reach, and are based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Are selected in the process of S307. In this control example, the type of super reach ("super reach A", "super reach B", etc.) is selected by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, but the invention is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the MPU 221 may be selected. Thus, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced.

  When the process of S502 or the process of S503 is finished, next, a first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S502 or the process of S503 is set (S504). Next, a first type-of-stop command for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of stop set in the process of S502 or S503 is set (S505). The first variation pattern command and the first stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 39), these commands are voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the first stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S505 is finished, the process returns to the first special symbol variation start process.

  In addition, by setting the first variation pattern command and starting the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time can be measured at the same time as the variation start of the first special symbol, and it is accurate. Fluctuation time can be measured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 24, S104), will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S204).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 28, S204), first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (S601). If it is determined in the process of S601 that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not the end timing (S601: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end timing (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203o is set ( S602). When it is determined in the process of S602 that the special view 1 jackpot flag 203o is set (S602: Yes), the probability change flag 203m is set to be off (S603). Various settings for the jackpot game are made based on the determined variation stop type (S604). Specifically, in the case of jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (up to the next time power supply)), jackpot B (16R hour shorts jackpot (power support 100 times)), the number of rounds when the jackpot game is executed is set to 16 times And the maximum opening time of the specific winning combination opening 65a in one round is set to 30s.

  After finishing the process of S604, next, in order to stop the fluctuation of the second special symbol, set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (S605), stop the fluctuation of the second special symbol of the first special symbol display device 37 Then, the process proceeds to step S609.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203o is off (S602: No), it is determined whether the time reduction counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S607). When it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S607: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S608). That is, the time saving counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol changes and is displayed once. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value smaller than 0 (that is, 0) (S607: No), the process of S608 is skipped and the process of S609 is performed.

  In the process of S609, a first fluctuation stop command is set which instructs the voice lamp control device 113 to stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (S609). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determined result of the determination of acceptability (S610), and the present processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 24, S104) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S206), since there is no hold in the second special symbol with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 25, S203) described above, the special symbol hold ball The difference is that the process of subtraction of the number counter (S303) and the process of shift processing of the special symbol holding ball storage area (S304) are unnecessary.

  Specifically, in the second special symbol variation start process (S206), first, it is determined whether data is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S701). In this embodiment, the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d because the second special symbol is not provided with a reserve. The fluctuation display based on the data is stored until it is stopped, and the fluctuation is stopped and erased (see S1013 in FIG. 32). Thus, while the variation based on the second special symbol is being executed, new data is not stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d and the variation based on the second special symbol is stopped. And new data can be stored.

  In the process of S701, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S701: No), it is not the timing to start the fluctuation of the second special symbol, so this processing ends .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that there is data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S701: Yes), whether or not the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed. It discriminates (S702).

  In the process of S702, when it is determined that the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is not being executed (S702: No), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection The process (S704) is performed, and the process ends. Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703) will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, and details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704) with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S702, if it is determined that the change based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed (S702: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol will not be a jackpot or a small jackpot In order to do this, it is set in the same manner as the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25). Specifically, the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a deviation (S705), and the second symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S706), and the process proceeds to S704. .

  As described above, when the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol executed during that time is all set as the outlier, and the variation based on the outlier is executed. In addition, although it is not restricted to this, while the change based on the big hit of the 1st special symbol is under execution, the change display of the 2nd special symbol is executed in the form of out, but the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol is preserved (stored ) May be used. Then, the jackpot game may be started based on the lottery result stored (stored) after the end of the jackpot game of the first special symbol. Furthermore, when the jackpot game is started based on the lottery result stored (stored) after the end of the jackpot game of the first special symbol, such an effect as if the jackpot game is continuing is executed You may

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S206) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703).

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 30, S703) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 26, S306) described above in that a small hit is included in the lottery result. Since the other points are the same, the detailed description about the same part is omitted.

  In the processing of S801 to S804, the lottery result of the second special symbol is acquired based on the data of the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, as in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (FIG. 26).

  When the process of S803 or S804 is finished, it is then determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (S805). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S805: Yes), a big hit symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, and the special figure 2 big hit The flag 203p is set on (S806), and the process returns to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29). By the process of S806, the first symbol display device 37 has a symbol based on the value of the first type counter C2 (for example, “7” in the case of 16R probability variation big hit) on the right side 7 segment LED of the 7 segment display 37b. Is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S805 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S805: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small win (S807.) If it is determined that the result is a small hit (S807: Yes), the small hit symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device is set based on the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 , Special figure 2 small hitting flag 203r is set (S808), it returns to the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start processing (see Figure 29).

  In the process of S807, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S807: No), the second special symbol out-of-pattern is set in the first symbol display device (S809), and the second special symbol fluctuation start Return to processing (see FIG. 29). In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “−” indicating detachment is set to the right 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37 b of the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S704) which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 29, S206) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 31, S704), the first variation pattern command set in the process of S504 of the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S307) is the second The variation pattern command is changed (S904), and the first stop type command set in the process of S505 is changed to a second stop type command (S905). In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it may be a small hit as a lottery result, if the lottery result is a small hit (S903: Yes), based on the special pattern 2 small hitting variation pattern table 202d2b Difference in that the fluctuation pattern is determined. The other parts are the same, so detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 24, S104) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 32, S207), the fluctuation stop processing (S1005 and S1006) for the second special symbol is performed on the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 28, S204) When stopping the change based on the small hit, it is different in setting the start of the small hit. The other parts are the same, so detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), first, similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 28), the process of S1001 to S1006 (the process of S601 to S606 in the first special symbol change stop process) Run. In addition, jackpot type in the second special symbol is different from jackpot type in the first special symbol, in the setting of the start of jackpot set in the process of S1004, various jackpot games according to jackpot type in the second special symbol Setting is done.

  Specifically, in the case of jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot (up to the next time power supply)), jackpot B (16R hour shorts jackpot (power support 100 times)), the number of rounds when the jackpot game is executed is set to 16 times And the maximum opening time of the specific winning combination opening 65a in one round is set to 30s. On the other hand, jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot (up to the next time the electric support)), jackpot D (2R hour short-time allowance jackpot (power support 100 times)), jackpot E (2R probability variation hourly short non-hit jackpot (without electricity support)), jackpot F (2R In the case of normal jackpot (without power support)), the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 0.5 s.

  When it is determined in the process of S1002 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203p is not set (S1002: No), it is then determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is set (S1007). If it is determined in the process of S1007 that the special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is set (S1007: Yes), the start of the small hit is set (S1008), and the process proceeds to the process of S1009. In the process of S1008, the number of rounds in which the small hitting game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 0.5 s.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1007 that the special figure 2 small hit flag 203r is not set (S1007: No), the process of S1008 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1009. When the processing of S1007 or S1008 is finished, the subtraction processing (S1009 and S1010) of the hour / minute counter 203k is executed similarly to the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 28), and the processing shifts to the processing of S1011.

  In the process of S1011, a second change stop command is set to instruct the sound lamp control device 113 to stop the change display of the second special symbol (S1011). The second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determined result of the determination of acceptability (S1012), and the present processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and concurrently configured to be executable, but one of the first or second special symbol When a big hit game occurs in the, the variation display of the other special symbol is stopped. Thereby, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In addition, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and parallelly executable, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. Can. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  Moreover, compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, the pachinko machine 10 has variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if it is relatively short, in either of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed, and by raising the efficiency of the game, It is possible to suppress the problem that the state in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner is long.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 34, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and the first winning port 64, the first right winning port 641, or the second winning port 640 is a winning (start winning) It is a process for determining the presence or absence of, and when there is a start winning, to obtain various random number counters, and to execute the hold processing of the value.

  When the start winning process (S105) is executed, it is first determined whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (start winning) (S1101). Here, entry of the ball into the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1101: Yes), the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S1102), and the first special symbol is created. The value of the holding ball number counter 203e (the number N1 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S1103). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1104).

  Then, when there is no winning on the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1101: No), or even if there is a winning on the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 the first special If the value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S1105: No), the process proceeds to S1108. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641 (S1101: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1104: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1105). And a ball holding number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) which shows the value of the 1st special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set (S1106).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 39) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value as the first special symbol 1 holding ball of the RAM 223 It stores in the number counter 203e.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S1106, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S1107). Specifically, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, since the winning information is not held in the second special symbol, in the processing of S1108 to S1112, the processing of adding the holding ball number counter and the processing of setting the holding ball number command with respect to the processing of S1101 to S1107 It differs in that various counter values are stored directly in the holding ball execution area without performing. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol is configured not to hold the winning information, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a predetermined number (for example, four balls) of winning information may be held similarly to the first special symbol. May be

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol is not being changed, a pressing suggestion effect that suggests pushing the skip switch 51 c so as to cause the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 is not displayed. Therefore, even if the first special symbol is not changing, if the game ball frequently enters the second winning opening 640, the game ball is incorrectly entered into the second winning opening 640. Is considered. Therefore, even though the first special symbol is not changing, the game balls entering the second winning opening 640 are counted, and when the counted number of game balls exceeds a predetermined number, error processing is performed. (S1109 and S1114 to S1116).

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the second winning opening 640 (whether or not the gaming ball has entered the second winning opening 640) (S1108). If it is determined in the process of S1108 that there is no winning in the second winning opening 640 (S1108: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1108 that there is a winning on the second winning opening 640 (S1108: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol is changing (S1109). If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the first special symbol is not changing (S1109: Yes), the abnormal ball entry counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111.

  In the process of S1111, it is determined whether or not there is data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S1111). In the process of S1111, if it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S1111: No), the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 Each value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S1112), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1113.

  If it is determined in the process of S1111 that there is data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S1111: Yes), the variation based on the second special symbol is being executed, so the process of S1112 is performed. Skip and shift to the processing of S1113. When it is determined that there is data in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d (S1111: Yes), the processing of S1112 is skipped, so that the prize information is not held for the second special symbol. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1109 that the first special symbol is not changing (S1109: No), the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 even though the first special symbol is not changing. Since this is the case of a sphere, the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is incremented by 1 (S1114), and the process proceeds to the process of S1115.

  In the process of S1115. It is determined whether the value of the abnormal ball entry counter 203t is larger than 3 (S1115). The abnormal entry counter 203t is initialized to 0 when the gaming ball enters the second winning opening 640 while the first special symbol is fluctuating (S1110). Therefore, even if the first special symbol has not changed, if four or more gaming balls enter the second winning opening 640, the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t becomes larger than three.

  The value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is also initialized to 0 when the gaming ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the first right winning opening 641 (S1102). That is, when the first special symbol changes, the value of the abnormal ball entry counter 203t is initialized to zero. Thereby, the fraudulent action of entering the game ball into the second winning hole 640 without starting the change of the first special symbol (not entering the game ball into the first winning hole 64 or the right first winning hole 641) It can be detected accurately. For example, when the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640 during the change of the first special symbol because the change of the first special symbol is started but the timing to press the skip switch 51 c is bad. In this case, since the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S1102), it is not determined as a fraudulent act.

  If it is determined in the process of S1115 that the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is larger than 3 (S1115: Yes), the first special symbol does not start to change (the first winning opening 64 or the first right winning opening 641). In the case where the game ball is not entered into the game ball) and the cheating such as entering the game ball into the second winning opening 640 is being executed, an error command is set (S1116) and the process of S1113 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1115 that the value of the abnormal ball entry counter 203t is 3 or less (S1115: No), the process of S1116 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1113.

  The error command set in the process of S1116 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like by the external output process of the main process described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes error processing (for example, notification by an error sound, notification by lighting of an LED indicating an error, etc.) corresponding to the command. Note that an error command may be set in the process of S1116, and a signal indicating the occurrence of the error may be output to the external output terminal plate 261. As a result, in the hall computer that is detecting the signal of the external output terminal plate 261, the occurrence of the error can be detected, and the clerk of the hall can be notified of the occurrence of the error.

  If it is determined in the process of S1115 that the value of the abnormal entry counter 203t is larger than 3 (S1115: Yes), that is, if it is determined that an illegal game is being executed using the skip switch 51c. The game ball may not be launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, or the launch intensity of the game ball launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c can not reach the second winning opening 640. It may be changed to strength. As a result, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts from being continued, and to suppress the problem that the gaming shop side is greatly damaged.

  After the processing of S1108, S1111, S1115, S1116 or S1109, the pre-reading processing is executed (S1113), and this processing ends. Details of the pre-reading process (S1113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it becomes impossible (or difficult) to enter the second winning opening 640 except for the game balls launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c. There is. Therefore, even though the skip switch 51c is not pressed, if the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, there is a possibility that the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning opening 640. Since it is high, the state may be notified. Specifically, a signal indicating the state may be output to the external output terminal plate 261 and may be detectable by the hall computer 262, or an error command may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 and an error command may be received. An error sound may be output by the control device 113, or an LED indicating an error may be turned on. In this way, it is possible to detect an unauthorized action that causes the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, when the suggestion effect (FIG. 6A) indicating the pressing of the skip switch 51c is not displayed, the number of balls to the second winning opening 640 may be a predetermined number of times when the skip switch 51c is pressed for a predetermined time or more. It may be determined that an illegal act has occurred when entering the ball, and the same process may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to more accurately determine and notify the injustice. In addition, cheating occurred when the number of balls entered into the second winning hole 640 increased compared to the number entered into the game balls into the first winning hole 64 or the right first winning hole 641. It may be determined that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winnings on the second winning opening 640 with respect to the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641. It may be determined that cheating has occurred when there is a large amount of C. In these cases, error processing may be performed as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, prefetch processing (S1113) which is one of the start winning processing (see S105 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S1113).

  In this pre-reading process (S1113), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64, the first right winning opening 641 or the second winning opening 640 (S1201). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64, the right first winning opening 641 or the second winning opening 640 (S1201; No), since there is no winning to perform pre-reading, this processing is ended as it is .

  On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64, the right first winning opening 641 or the second winning opening 640 (S1201: Yes), the game state at the time when the variation based on the winning is started is definitely changed It is determined whether or not it is a gaming state (S1202). When it is determined in the process of S1202 that the gaming state at the start of the change is the probability variation gaming state (S1202: Yes), based on the first random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 12A). The lottery result is obtained (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1203, when there is a new winning to the first winning opening 64 or the right first winning opening 641, the lottery result is acquired using the jackpot determination value of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when there is a new winning on the second winning opening 640, the lottery result is obtained using the jackpot determination value and the small hitting determination value of the second special symbol (see FIG. 12A).

  If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the gaming state at the start of variation is not the probability variation gaming state (S1202: No), based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 12A). The lottery result is acquired (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1204, similarly to the process of S1203, when there is a new winning to the first winning opening 64 or the first right winning opening 641, there is a new winning to the first special symbol and the second winning opening 640. In this case, the determination value of the second special symbol is used.

  When the process of S1203 or S1204 is finished, a prize information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the process of S1203 or S1204 is set (S1205), and the process ends. In this pre-reading process (S1110), it is not limited to the present embodiment, but it is judged up to the type of the fluctuation pattern to be selected (outside reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) It may be configured to be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the electric motor accompanying the right first winning opening 641 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 641a and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 35, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S1301). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric role item 641a attached to the right first winning hole 641 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S1301: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S1302), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S1302: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1307). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is greater than 0 (S1308), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1308: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1308: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1309).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1310). In the process of S1310, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is sequentially shifted toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is acquired (S1311).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1312). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol (S1312: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1314). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1314: Yes), the process proceeds to S1313.

  In the process of S1314, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1314: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired by the process of S1311 Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 12 (c)) for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is obtained (S1315) . Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 12 (c)).

  In the process of S1312, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1312: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1313. In the process of S1313, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1311, Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S1313). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 12 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S1313 or S1315 is the hit of the normal symbol (S1316), and when it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S1316: Yes) The display mode at the time of hit is set (S1318). In the process of S1318, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol of "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S1319), and if the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S1319: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S1321). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1321: Yes), the process proceeds to S1320. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the ball is excessively prized in the first right winning opening 641, thereby suppressing the game ball from flowing downward to the first right winning opening 641. Even when the normal symbol is hit, the number of times and the opening time of the motorized accessory 641a are set as in the case of the normal symbol being detached.

  In the process of S1321, if it is not the jackpot of the special symbol (S1321: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the right first prize opening The opening period of the motorized accessory 641a attached to 641 is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1322), and the processing shifts to the processing of S1323. In the process of S1319, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S1319: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1320. In the process of S1320, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the motorized jack 641a attached to the first right winning opening 641 is While setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S1320), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1323.

  In the process of S1316, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S1316: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S1317). In the process of S1317, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S1323.

  In the process of S1323, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1323), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S1323: Yes), fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S1324), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1325: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S1325), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the opening period of the first right winning prize opening 641 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the right first winning hole 641.

  In the process of S1302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S1303). Here, the fluctuation time is a time preset by the processing of S1324 or the processing of S1325 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S1303, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1303: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S1303: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S1318, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lit display Set to be On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S1318, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) Is set (S1318). If the stop display is set by the process of S1317, then the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 39) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device is ended. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S1318 or the process of S1317, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (this time lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 35, S106) is the ordinary symbol It is determined whether it is a hit or not (S1305). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S1305: Yes), the start of the open / close control of the electric combination 641a attached to the first right winning opening 641 is set (S1306), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized part 641a is set by the process of S1306, the opening / closing of the motorized part is performed when the motored part opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 39) is performed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the motor-operated accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S1320 or S1322 end. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the normal symbol (S1305: No), the process of S1306 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. Is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 36, S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401). Here, passage of the ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has passed the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S 1401: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203 g (number M of holdings of variable display in normal symbol) is obtained ( S1402). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1403).

  Whether the ball has passed the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S 1401: No) or the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203 g even if the ball has passed the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 If the M) is not less than 4 (S1403: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (S1401: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1403: Yes), the normal symbol holding The value (M) of the ball number counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S1404). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 Is stored in the area (S1405), and the process ends. In the process of S1405, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 38, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1612 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1612 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1715 of the main process (FIG. 39). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S1613, S1614), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1604: Yes) S1607: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S1608). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S1610, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Here, when the special symbol in change is stored, the display control unit 114 causes the sound lamp control unit 113 to change and display the power-on fluctuation image (refer to FIGS. 18B to 18C). You will be instructed to Note that this variation instruction may be executed, for example, in the initial setting (S1601) in the start-up process, or may be executed in another process. Then, the interruption is permitted (S1611), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1708 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S1710 and S1711 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 39), first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 24) and the start winning process (see FIG. 33) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 38) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 39), but may be performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The details of the jackpot control process (S1704) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of the jackpot control process (S1704) is finished, the small hit control process (S1705) is then executed. In the small hitting control process, as in the big hit control process (S1704) described above, the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is controlled, and the corresponding command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 according to the start and end timing of the small hitting game. Send. Specifically, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 32), when the start of the small winning is set, control is performed so that the number of times of opening of the specific winning a prize opening 65a becomes 2 (round number). And the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is controlled to 0.5 s. Further, the interval from the closing of the specific winning opening 65a to the opening thereof is also controlled to 0.5 s. When opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65 a is executed, the voice lamp control device 113 is transmitted by transmitting a command indicating that the specific winning opening 65 a has changed to the open (or closed) state to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, it is possible to determine the state (open or closed state) of the specific winning opening 65a.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory 641a attached to the first right winning opening 641 (S1706). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S1306 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 35), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S1322 or the process of S1320 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 27) or the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 31), according to the variation pattern The variable display is started on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25) or the process of S704 of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) When the corresponding fluctuation time ends, the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 25) of the special symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 25) 27) or in the display mode set by the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 31), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S1324 or the processing of S1325 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 35), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S1304 in the normal symbol change processing (see FIG. 35), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S1317 or the processing of S1318 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 35). Do.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1710) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described S1701 and subsequent processes are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1710: No), during the time to the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main processing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1711, S1712).

  First, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1711). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1712).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1709, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 37 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S1713 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1713), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1714). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1715), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1716), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1709 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1708, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1711 and S1712 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1701. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1701. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1601. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 40, S1704), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801). Specifically, the process of S604 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), the probability change flag 203m is turned off (S1802), the opening command is set (S1803), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1801 (S1801: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1804). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1804, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1804: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1804, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1804: Yes), the process of S1805 is executed. In the process of S1805, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1805). In the process of S1805, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1805: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened (S1806), and it is newly started. A round number command indicating the number of rounds is set (S1807), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1805 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1805: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is satisfied. (S1808). If the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1808: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1809), and then the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied in the process of S1808 (S1808: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1810). The start timing of the ending effect is determined as the start timing of the ending effect when the final round in each jackpot type is ended and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1810: Yes), the special view 1 jackpot flag 203o or the special view 2 jackpot flag 203p is turned off (S1811), and the ending command is set (S1812). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a definite variation jackpot (S 1813). In the process of S1813, if it is a probability variation big hit (S1813: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S1814), and the process shifts to the processing of S1815.

  In the process of S1815, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot E (2R probability variation present time non-zero hit (without power support)) (S1815). If it is determined in the process of S1815 that the big hit type is not big hit E (2R probability variation present time non hit big hit (no electricity support)) (S1815: No), the time saving flag 203s is turned on to give time saving gaming state. After setting (S1816), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1815 that the big hit type is big hit E (2R probability variation present time no hit (no power support)) (S1815: Yes), the process of S1816 is skipped, that is, time saving This processing is ended without giving a gaming state.

  In the process of S1813, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is not determined (S1813: No), it is then determined whether or not the time junior high championship is determined (S1817). If it is determined in the process of S1817 that the time-speaking jackpot is found (S1817: Yes), the time-storing counter 203k is set to 100 (S1818), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1817 that it is not a short time jackpot (S1817: No), it is a normal jackpot where neither a probability change gaming state nor a time saving game state is awarded, so the time saving flag 203s is set to OFF (S1819) In step S1820, the time-span counter 203k is set to 0 (S1820), and the process ends.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon power-on and a main process (S2000) executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1901). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S2017 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary stop") in the current start-up process (see FIG. 42). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1902). As described later with reference to FIG. 42, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2013 in FIG. 42), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S2017. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2017 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1902: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S2017. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1903).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1903: Yes), the process proceeds to S1904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1903: No), the process proceeds to S1908.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction in the RAM 223 (S1903: Yes), and the process moves to S1904. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S2017 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1903: No), and the process moves to S1908.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1902: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2017, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1904, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1904). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1905: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1906). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1905: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1908, it is determined whether the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1908). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S2017 is performed (see FIG. 42, S2016). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S2017 is performed, it is the current start-up process that the process of S1908 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is a case where the power failure process has started after the power failure process of S2017 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1909), and the power-off flag 223y is turned off (S1910). After setting the initial value of (S1911), interrupt permission is set (S1912), and the process proceeds to the main processing (S2000). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1908 when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is, for example, because the power-on processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and S1908 through S1906. Or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1908: No), S1909 and S1910, which are the clear processing of the work area of the RAM 223, are skipped, the process proceeds to S1911, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1911).

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1909 is that when the process of S1908 is reached through the processes of S1904 to S1906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1904, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main processing (S2000) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S2000). When the main process (S2000) is performed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S2000) was started or the process of S2001 was performed last time (S2000). If one millisecond or more has not elapsed (S2001: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2012 without performing the process of S2002 to S2011. In the process of S2001, it is the process concerning display (rendering) that it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in S2002 to S2011, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S2012 and the command determination process of S2013 in a short cycle. Execution of the processing of S2013 in a short cycle can prevent omission of reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and execution of the processing of S2013 in a short cycle causes the command received by the command determination process to be received. Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2001 (S2001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2003 to S2013 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S2002). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2008 described later (S2003), and then the power on notification process is executed (S2004). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, notification by power on notification processing is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

  In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S2006). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the number-of-helds display update process (S2006), although described later in detail, a process of updating the display of the held symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data of the winning information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S2007). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S2008), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2009, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S2008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S2009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S2010, the suggestion at the time of closing indication of the suggestion effect mentioned above, the indication rendering process for performing the indication suggestion of pressing at opening time is executed (S2011), and then the process proceeds to the processing of S2012. This suggestion effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2012, in order to display the fluctuation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the variation display setting process (S2012), a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S2013). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2013 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2014). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2014 (S2014: Yes), the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag 223x are both turned on (S2016), and the power-off processing is executed (S2017) . After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2018), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2014 (S2014: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2015) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2015: No), the processing returns to S2001, and the main processing (S2000) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2015: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is an infinite loop, the main processing (S2000) is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is executed in the main process (S2000) (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 Determine The details of the command determination process (S2013) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the winning information storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main control device It is determined whether or not the first variation pattern command has been received from 110 (S2101). Here, the first change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the first fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2101: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2102). A variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S2103). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as being the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2603) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the process of S2103 is completed, the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON based on the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S2102 and the value of the effect counter 223e. Specifically, if the variation pattern is normal reach (30 seconds) and the value of the effect counter 223e is 0 to 30, the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to ON in order to execute the suggestion effect. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is not the normal reach (30 seconds) or the value of the effect counter 223e is 31 to 198, the suggestion effect is not performed, so the suggestion effect flag 223f is kept off. Here, when the suggestion effect flag 223 f is set to ON, setting is made so that various indication effects (pressing suggestion effect upon closing, suggestion effect upon pressing upon opening) are displayed in the suggestion effect processing described later (see FIG. 49). Be done. When the process of S2104 is completed, the present process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is determined whether the second variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2105). Here, the second change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the second fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2105: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2106). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S2107). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as being the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2607) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has not been received (S2105: No), it is determined whether the first or second type-of-stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2108). If it is determined that the first or second type-of-stop command is received (S2108: Yes), if the first type-of-stop command is received, the first type-of-stop selection flag 223d1 is set to ON. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to on. (S2109). A stop type (one of 16R probability variation big hits and 16R hour-long shorts per package) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S2110). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the first stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol Are stored so as to be identifiable.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S2108: No), it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2111). If it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S2111: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the received holding ball number command (that is, the main control device 110 The number of holding balls of the first special symbol held in the) is extracted, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2112).

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the right first winning opening 641 (start winning), each time there is a starting winning In the process of S2112, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, respectively. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. At the time of detection, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol does not hold the winning information, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special symbol may hold the winning information. In this case, by transmitting the holding ball number command in the same manner as the first special symbol, the value of the holding ball number counter of the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113 and the main control device 110 can be adjusted.

  If it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S2111: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2113). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S2113: Yes), the winning information (the result of the pass / fail judgment, the stop type, the variation pattern) is extracted from the received command and the winning information storage area of the RAM 233 is used as the winning information. It stores in 223a (S2114). Then, the effect creation process at the time of winning (S2115) is executed, and this process is ended. The details of the prize effect changing process (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2113: No), it is determined whether the first change stop command or the second change stop command has been received (S2116). If it is determined that the first change stop command or the second change stop command has been received (S2116: Yes), the display change stop command based on the received first change stop command or the second change stop command. Is set (S2117), the suggestion effect flag 223f is turned off, the suggestion effect state storage area 223g is cleared (S2118), and the process proceeds to S2119.

  In the process of S2119, it is determined whether the received command is a special view 2 fluctuation stop command (S2119). If it is determined in the process of S2119 that the received command is the special view 2 fluctuation stop command (S2119: Yes), the effect change flag 223h is set to OFF (S2120), and this process is ended. Here, when the effect change flag 223h is on, the effect change process (FIG. 47) is executed in one change based on the second special symbol, and the effect is changed. Therefore, when the effect flag 223h is on, the effect change process (or the pseudo effect change process) is not performed. If it is determined that the command received in the process of S2119 is the special view 2 change stop command, the effect change process (FIG. 47) is executed and the change whose effect is changed is stopped, so the effect is changed. By turning off the flag 223h, in the next and subsequent changes. It is possible to execute the effect change process (FIG. 47).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2119 that the variable stop command is not the special view 2 variable stop command (S2119: No), the process of S2120 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first change stop command or the second change stop command has not been received (S2116: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S2121). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S2121: Yes), the jackpot command processing is executed (S2122), and this processing ends. The details of the jackpot command processing (S2122) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S2121: No), processing according to the other commands is executed (S2123), and this processing ends. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the jackpot command processing (S2120) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this jackpot command processing (S2120).

  In the jackpot command processing (S2120), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S2201). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2201: Yes), the display opening command is set based on the received opening command (S2202), and the pseudo effect change flag 223i is set to OFF (S2203). ), End this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2204). If it is determined that the round number command is received (S2204: Yes), a display round command is set based on the received round number command (S2205), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2206). If it is determined in the process of S2206 that the ending command has not been received (S2206: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the command determination process.

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 that the ending command is received (S2206: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2207), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a prize-production effect change process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this winning effect effect change process (S2115).

  In the effect creation process at the time of winning (S2115), first, it is determined whether or not the non-electric role thing 640a is in the open state (S2301). If it is determined that the non-electric role thing 640a is not in the open state (S2301: No), since the gaming ball does not enter the second winning opening 640, this processing ends. In the process of S2301, the open / close state of the non-motor-operated part 640a is determined by a rotation sensor (not shown) attached to the rotary shaft 640b of the non-motor-operated part 640a. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the open / close state of the non-electric handpiece 640a may be determined by determining the rotational state of the open / close switching member 902 or the first flow path switching member 900f using a rotation sensor. In addition, by providing a magnetic sensor or an optical sensor at a position where the non-motorized part 640a is turned on when it is closed (or opened), the open / close state of the non-motorized part 640a may be determined. By detecting the positions of members (for example, the open / close switching member 902 and the first flow path switching member 900f) that are operated to open and close the other non-electric workpiece 640a. It may be determined.

  Furthermore, if the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 (when there is a second special symbol winning) even though the non-electric role thing 640a is not open, an error process (error sound) , An error occurrence display, or a signal indicating an error to the external output terminal plate 261 may be output. In this way, it is possible to detect an illegal act of illegally entering the game ball into the second winning opening 640.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the non-electric role thing 640a is in the open state (S2301: Yes), it is next determined whether the current winning is the second special symbol winning (S2302). If it is determined that the second special symbol has not been won in the process of S2302 (S2302: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the second special symbol has been won (S2302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is currently being changed (S2303). If it is determined that the first special symbol is not in motion (S2303: No), the skip switch is not performed if the first special symbol variation is not being performed (ie, the pressing suggestion effect is not displayed), the skip switch Since 51c is pressed and the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, the game method description effect which is the effect for explaining the game method is set (S2304), and this process is ended. Specifically, in the game method explanation effect, the characters “Please release the skip switch!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device, and a voice “Please release the skip switch” is output.

  It is to be noted that the game method description effect may be set when the skip switch 51c is pressed despite the fact that the first special symbol is not being changed. In addition, a signal indicating the state may be output to the external output terminal plate 261 so as to be detectable by the hall computer 262. In this way, it is possible to detect an illegal act such as entering the game ball into the second winning opening 640 despite the fact that the variation of the first special symbol is not executed. In this case, when the first special symbol is not changing, it is determined that the skip switch 51c is pressed for a predetermined time or longer, or the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined number of balls or more, which is determined to be incorrect. The signal may be output to the external output terminal plate 261. Thereby, it is possible to more accurately determine and notify the injustice.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being changed (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether the suggestion effect flag 223f is on (S2305). In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the suggestion effect flag 223f is off (S2305: No), since it is not the timing to display the indication effect, the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2305 that the suggestion effect flag 223f is on (S2305: Yes), it is then determined whether the effect change flag 223h and the pseudo effect change flag 223i are off (S2306).

  If it is determined in the process of S2306 that either the effect change flag 223h or the pseudo effect change flag 223i is on (S2306: No), the effect change process (S2309) or the pseudo effect change process (S2308) has already been performed. Since the process is executed and the effect is changed, the present process ends. As a result, although a battle effect or rank-up effect is being performed, which is set to be displayed by the effect change process (S2309) or the pseudo effect change process (S2308), a new winning is generated again. It is possible to suppress a defect that a battle effect or a rank up effect is set.

  In the process of S2306, when it is determined that both the effect change flag 223h and the pseudo effect change flag 223i are off (S2306: Yes), the effect change process (S2309) or the pseudo effect change process (S2308) in the fluctuation. Because the process is not executed, the process shifts to the process of S2307.

  In the process of S2307, it is determined whether the variation being executed is the variation of the jackpot of the first special symbol (S2307). If it is determined in the process of S2307 that the change is a jackpot of the first special symbol (S2307: Yes), the pseudo rendering change process is executed (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2310. The details of the pseudo rendering change process (S2306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2307 that the change being executed is not the change of the jackpot of the first special symbol (S2307: No), the effect change process is executed (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310 . The details of the effect change process (S2308) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2308 or S2309 is finished, the suggestion effect flag 223f is set to OFF, the suggestion effect state storage area 223g is cleared, and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the pseudo-effect change processing (S2306) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the pseudo effect change process (S2306).

  In the pseudo rendering change process (S2306), first, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than 20 seconds (S2401). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than 20 seconds (S2401: Yes), a display effect change command based on the revival battle effect is set according to the remaining fluctuation time (S2402). End the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds or less (S2401: No), next, is the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol longer than 10 seconds? It is determined whether or not (S2403). If it is determined in the process of S2403 that the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than 10 seconds (S2403: Yes), a display effect command based on the first winning battle effect is set according to the remaining fluctuation time. (S2404), this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S 2403 that the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds or less (S 2403: No), then whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than 5 seconds Is determined (S2405). If it is determined in the process of S2405 that the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than 5 seconds (S2405: Yes), a display effect command based on the second winning battle effect is set according to the remaining fluctuation time. (S2406), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2405 that the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 5 seconds or less (S2405: No), a change command for display based on one-shot notification effect is set (S2407), The pseudo effect change flag 223i is set to on (S2408), and the process ends.

  Thus, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the battle effect is set according to the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol . Thereby, the end timing of the battle effect where the effect is started based on entering the second winning opening, and the end timing of the change based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, that is, the start of the jackpot game of the first special symbol The timing can be matched, and an effect without a sense of discomfort can be provided to the player. In addition, since the out-of-round battle effect is not set based on the second special symbol becoming out-of-order, it becomes a big hit despite the fact that the out-of-order battle effect is displayed, and the player is confused Problems can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, an effect change process (S2307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this effect change process (S2307).

  In this effect change process (S2307), first, an effect is selected from the effect change selection table 222b based on the gaming state and the lottery result of the second special symbol (S2501). Specifically, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until the next charge))" probability variation hit battle effect (30 seconds) Is selected, and if "big hit B (16R hour shorts big hit (power support 100 times))", then time short hit battle effect (30 seconds) is selected, and if "small hit", skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected If it is selected and "off", out-of-round battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until the charge support next time))", "big hit D (2R time junior high hit (power support 100 times )), "Big hit E (2R probability variation with no short hit (without charge support))" or "big hit F (2R normal hit (without charge support))" (see FIG. 12 (b)).

  In addition, if the gaming state is a short time gaming state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit C (2R probability variation big hit (until the next charge)) probability variation rank up effect (12 seconds) is selected If it is "big hit D (2R hour shorts big hit (power support 100 times))", the additional rank-up effect (12 seconds) is selected, and if "small hit", the skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected If it is "off", an off rank up effect (12 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is a short time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until the power support next time))", "big hit B (16R time short hit (power support 100 times) )), "Big hit E (2R probability variation with no short hit (without charge support))" or "big hit F (2R normal hit (without charge support))" (see FIG. 12 (b)).

  In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol, "big hit E (2R probability variation with time short non-hit jackpot (without power support))", "big hit F (2R normal jackpot (power support If there is no)) or "small hit", skip effect (2.5 seconds) is selected, and if it is "off", an off battle effect (30 seconds) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is a short time gaming state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit A (16R probability variation big hit (until the power support next time))", "big hit B (16R time short hit (power support 100 times) )), "Large C (2R probability variation big (during power support until next time))" or "Larly hit D (2R time short-dense large power (100 times power support))" (see FIG. 12 (b)).

  As described above, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, a probability variation or a time-shortening battle effect (30 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). Since the fluctuation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state is fluctuation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (b)), the timing at which the fluctuation A (30 seconds) ends It is possible to coincide with the end timing of the battle variation (30 seconds) per a definite variation or a short time.

  Also, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state is a variation C (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (c)), the small hitting game playing time is 2 seconds (The opening time of the specified winning opening 0.5 seconds and closing time 0.5 seconds × 2 times). Therefore, the timing (total 2.5 seconds) at which the variation C (0.5 seconds) ends and the subsequent small hitting game (2 seconds) ends matches the end timing of the skip effect (2.5 seconds) be able to. Since this skip effect is displayed until the end timing of the small hitting game, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the small hitting has occurred and that the small hitting game has been executed. By displaying the skip effect, the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, and the player is given the impression that the variation based on the suspension of the next first special symbol is started (skipped) to the player. Can.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol is out in the probability variation gaming state, out of step battle effect (30 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is detached in the probability variation gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (d)). Therefore, the timing at which the change A (30 seconds) ends can be matched with the end timing of the out-of-order battle effect (30 seconds).

  Next, if the second special symbol is a big hit in the short time game state, promotion or additional rank-up effect (12 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15B). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is a big hit in the short time game state is the change B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (b)), the playing time of the big hit game is 2 seconds (specific winning opening Open time 0.5 seconds and closed time 0.5 seconds × 2)). Therefore, the timing (12 seconds in total) when fluctuation B (10 seconds) ends and the big hit game (2 seconds) after that can be matched with the end timing (12 seconds) of promotion or additional rank-up effect .

  Also, when the second special symbol is a small hit in the time saving game state, skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the same as when the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state, the end timing (total 2.5 seconds) of the small hitting game executed in the time saving gaming state The end timing is the same.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol is out in the time saving game state, out-of-rank rank-up effect (10 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is removed in the time saving game state is variation B (10 seconds) (see FIG. 14 (d)). Therefore, the end timing of the fluctuation B (10 seconds) can be matched with the end timing of the out-of-rank rank effect (10 seconds).

  Here, the promotion or additional rank-up effect (12 seconds) and the out-of-order rank-up effect (10 seconds) have different presentation times, but the first half of each stage is the same stage, and the second half of the stage At (when 8 seconds have passed since the effect was displayed), it is possible to determine whether the rank-up effect is a promotion rank-up effect, an additional rank-up effect, or an out-of-rank effect. As a result, the player can be kept interested until the second half of the rank-up effect, so the player's interest can be improved.

  Then, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state, skip effect (2.5 seconds) is executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is the timing at which the jackpot game is executed in the normal gaming state (total 2.5), as in the case where the second special symbol is a small hit in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state And the end timing match. This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the jackpot game has been executed, and it is difficult to recognize that the lottery result based on the second special symbol has become the jackpot (or, Can not do).

  Further, also when the second special symbol is a small hit in the normal gaming state, the skip effect is similarly executed (see FIG. 15 (b)). This skip effect (2.5 seconds) is a normal game, as in the case where the second special symbol is a big win in the normal gaming state, or the second special symbol is a small win in the probability variation gaming state or the short time gaming state. The end timing (total 2.5 seconds) of the small hitting game executed in the state and the end timing coincide with each other.

  Furthermore, when the second special symbol falls out in the normal gaming state, an out-of-battle effect (30 seconds) is executed. The variation pattern selected when the second special symbol is off in the normal gaming state is variation A (30 seconds) (see FIG. 14D). Therefore. The timing at which the change A (30 seconds) to be executed based on the second special symbol's end is completed can be matched with the end timing of the off battle presentation (30 seconds).

  In the present embodiment, during the fluctuation of the jackpot based on the first special symbol, the out-of-order battle effect is not set based on the second special symbol becoming detached, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is In response, the jackpot effect is executed (see FIG. 46). That is, since it is a case where both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol become off when out-of-battle effect is executed, it becomes a big hit even though the out-of-out battle effect is displayed Since there is no problem, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine. In addition, when the change of the out of charge based on the first special symbol is being executed, if the change of the out of charge based on the first special symbol is stopped during the display of the out of battle effect, if the out of turn effect is executed In the state where the battle rendition is continued, the variation of the first special symbol based on the next hold is started. On the other hand, if the variation of the outlier based on the first special symbol is continuously executed even at the end of the battle effect, the variation display of the outlier based on the first special symbol after ending the out-of-out battle effect Will be executed for the remaining time.

  After the process of S2501, based on the effect selected in the process of S2501, a display effect change command is set (S2502), and a effect change flag 223h for indicating that the effect has been changed in the main effect change process is set. It sets to ON (S2503), and ends this processing.

  As described above, when the out-of-order battle effect is stopped due to the effect change processing, the fluctuation other than the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped based on the fact that the second special symbol lottery result is a small hit, ie, It is displayed when the jackpot game is not executed after the end of the battle effect. Further, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol by the above-described pseudo effect change process, that is, when the big hit game is executed after the end of the battle effect. Is a hit battle effect where the out-of-order battle effect and the first half of the effect are the same effect. Thereby, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, it can be made impossible to determine whether or not the variation of the first special symbol is a big hit until the second half of the battle effect. As a result, since the player can be kept interested until the second half of the battle production, the player's interest can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the skip effect and the battle effect described above are configured to be displayed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it may be displayed when the skip switch 51c is pressed. This makes it possible to intensify the impression that a skip effect or the like is displayed by pressing the skip switch 51c. In addition, during a period from the pressing of the skip switch 51c to the game ball entering the second winning opening 640, an effect different from the skip effect or the battle effect may be separately performed. Thereby, the display of the effect (such as skip effect) displayed based on the depression of the skip switch 51c and the entering or entering of the second winning opening 640 of the game ball launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c. It is possible to suppress the problem that inconsistency occurs with the lottery result based on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the variable display setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S2012). This variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2012) is one of main processes (S2000) (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2012) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from main controller 110 in order to cause variation display effect to be displayed on third symbol display device 81. And sets a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and executes processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114. Also, based on the extracted stop type (16R probability variation big hit, 16R hourly short hit), processing for setting a display first or second stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 48, S2012), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2601). When it is determined that the first change start flag 223c1 is off (S2601: No), the first change pattern command is not received from the main control unit 110, so the process of S2605 is executed. Do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S2601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to be off (S2602).

  Next, in the process of S2603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the process of S2103 of the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013) is added to the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. More specifically, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is set (S2603). In addition, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command of 2 bytes configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01" the second special symbol It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S2002) of the main process (FIG. 42, S2000). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the display area at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. , The first special symbol (the third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the first special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and one holding data corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a is one. It is shifted to the previous holding area.

  When the process of S2603 is finished, measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is started (S2604). Specifically, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern set in the process of S2603 is stored in the RAM 223, and measurement is performed by subtracting every 1 ms in the main process. The variation time of the first special symbol measured here is referred to in the pseudo effect change process (see FIG. 46), and various battle effects are set according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol. Thereby, during the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol, the end timing of the battle effect displayed based on the entering of the gaming ball to the second winning opening 640, and the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol The end timing, that is, the start timing of the jackpot game of the first special symbol can be made to coincide with one another, and the player can be provided with a feeling of no discomfort.

  When the process of S2601 or S2604 is completed, it is determined whether the second change start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2605). When it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is not on (that is, off) (S2605: No), the first fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S2609 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S2605: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to be off (S2606).

  In the process of S2107 of the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, A variation pattern command for display of a special symbol is set (S2607).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2607 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S2002) of the main process (FIG. 42, S2000). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  After the process of S2607, measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is started in the same manner as the process of S2604 (S2608).

  When the process of S2605 or S2608 is completed, it is next determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S2609). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to on (that is, off) (S2609: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S2609: Yes), if the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, If the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to off (S2610).

  Next, in the process of S2110 of the command determination process (FIG. 43, S2013), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or the second stop type command is set (S2611). If the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 the stop type (16R probability variation big hit, which one of 16R hour junior high hit) A display first stop type command for notification is set. In addition, if the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 the stop type (16R probability variation big hit, 16R hour junior high hit or not ) Is set (S2612). The first or second stop type command notified from the main control unit 110 is for notifying the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the determination result is out of order. . If the determination result is out, the out type is not referred to and the out pattern is set.

  By being configured in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to change and display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a suggestion effect process (S2011) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this suggestion effect process (S2011). This suggestion effect process (FIG. 49, S2011) is a process of the main process (S2000) (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the suggestion effect process (FIG. 49, S2011), first, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag 223f is on (S2701). If it is determined in the process of S2701 that the suggestion effect flag 223h is not on (S2701: No), it is not the timing to execute (display) the suggestion effect, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestion effect flag 223h is on in the process of S2701 (S2701: Yes), next, it is determined whether the gaming state is a definite change or a short time gaming state (S2702).

  If it is determined in the process of S2702 that the gaming state is not a definite change or a short time gaming state (S2702: No), this processing is ended since no suggestion effect suggesting pressing of the skip switch 51c is executed (displayed) .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2702 that the gaming state is a definite change or a short time gaming state (S2702: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S2703 to execute (display) a suggested effect.

  In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is changing (S2703). If it is determined in the process of S2703 that the first special symbol is not changing (S2703: No), this process is ended because the suggestion effect is not executed (displayed).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the first special symbol is changing (S2703: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2704 in order to execute (display) a suggested effect.

  In the process of S2704, it is determined whether or not the non-motor-operated part 640a is in the closed state (S2704). In the process of S2704, when it is determined that the non-motorized part 640a is in the closed state (S2704: Yes), an effect that suggests to press the skip switch 51c when the non-motorized part 640a is in the closed state. In order to execute (display) the closing suggestion effect at the time of closing, the process moves to the processing of S2705.

  In the process of S2705, it is determined whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed (S2705). When the skip switch 51 c is pressed, a command indicating that the skip switch 51 c is pressed is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113. Based on whether or not this command has been received, it is determined whether or not the skip switch 51c is pressed. The present invention is not limited to this, and pressing of the skip switch 51 c may be directly detected by the voice lamp control device 113.

  If it is determined in the process of S2705 that the skip switch 51c is pressed (S2705: Yes), the value of the gauge level 223j is incremented by 1 (S2706), and the process proceeds to the process of S2707. When the skip switch 51c is pressed, the gauge level 223j is increased by the process of S2706, so the area displayed by lighting of the gauge displayed in the closing suggestion effect at the time of closing is increased.

  In the process of S2707, it is determined whether or not the value of the gauge level 223j is greater than 4500 (S2707). If it is determined in the process of S2707 that the value of the gauge level 223j is larger than 4500 (S2707: Yes), the value of the gauge level 223j is set to 4500, and the process proceeds to the process of S2710. As a result of the process of S2707, the value of the gauge level 223j set based on the depression of the skip switch 51c is limited to the value up to 4500. As a result, the area on which the gauge is lit and displayed in the closing suggestion effect upon closing by pressing the skip switch 51c is limited to 90% of the maximum width. If the area displayed on the gauge is limited to 90% of the maximum width, even if the area displayed on the gauge is repeated between 88% and 92% of the maximum width. Good. As a result, the increase in the gauge is limited, and the effect becomes monotonous, whereby it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2705 that the skip switch 51c is not pressed (S2705: No), the value of the gauge level 223j is set to 0, and the process proceeds to the process of S2710. When the skip switch 51c is not pressed by the process of S2709, the gauge level 223j becomes 0, and the area displayed in the lighting display of the gauge displayed in the closing suggestion effect at the time of closing becomes 0.

  In the process of S2710, it is determined whether the operation port induction flow path switch 800 is on. If it is determined that the operation port induction flow channel switch 800 is on (S2710: Yes), the value of the gauge level 223j is set to 5000 (S2711), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2712.

  Since the value of the gauge level 223j is set to the maximum value of 5000 by the process of S2711, the area displayed on the gauge displayed in the closing suggestion effect upon closing is maximized (that is, the entire area of the gauge is on) Is displayed). Further, when the value of the gauge level 223 j is 5000, a comment is displayed in the closing suggestion effect at the time of closing.

  Here, the operation port induction flow path switch 800 is turned on when the gaming ball enters the operation port 670 and the non-electric role object 640a is opened thereafter. Although the details will be described later, when the non-motor-actuated role thing 640a is in the open state, an indication at the time of opening is suggested (displayed). Thereby, by pressing the skip switch 51c, the area displayed by lighting of the gauge displayed in the closing suggestion effect at the time of closing increases, and when all the gauges are displayed by lighting, a comment is displayed, which will be described later. It is possible to give the player an impression that the display is switched to the suggestion effect at the time of opening. When the gaming ball enters the operation opening 670, the value of the gauge level 223j may be set to 5000.

  If it is determined in the process of S2710 that the operation port induction flow path switch 800 is not on (S2710: No), the process of S2711 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2712.

  In the process of S2712, a display closing pressing suggestion effect command is set based on the value of the gauge level 223j (S2712), and a value indicating a pressing depression suggestion effect during closing is set in the suggestion effect state storage area 223g ( S2713), the process ends. The value of gauge level 223j is also stored in the suggestion effect state storage area (or the value indicating the value of gauge level 223j and the value indicating the pressing indication effect at closing is stored), and the pressing effect at closing action is suggested If the value of the gauge level 223j does not change, the process of S2712 may be skipped. As a result, the command to be transmitted to the display control device 114 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  If it is determined in the process of S2704 that the non-motor-operated part 640a is in the open state (S2704: No), it is then determined whether or not the release suggestion at the time of opening is in progress (S2714). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the suggested effect state storage area 223g is a value indicating an open when pressed suggested effect.

  In the process of S2714, when it is determined that the indication at the time of opening indication is under execution (display) (S2714: Yes), since the indication at the time of opening indication is already displayed, the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2714, when it is determined that the indication at the time of opening indication is not being executed (displayed) (S2714: No), the indication at the time of opening indication for executing (displaying) the indication of pressing indication when opening is indicated A rendering command is set (S2715), and a value indicating that it is in an open at the time of suggesting pushing at the time of opening is stored in the suggested rendering state storage area 223g (S2716), and this processing ends.

  In addition, you may change the probability that the pressing suggestion effect (pressing suggestion effect at the time of opening, pressing suggestion effect at the time of closing) mentioned above may be displayed according to the number of holding balls of a 1st special symbol. Specifically, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is large, the pressing suggestion effect is easily displayed, and when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is small, the pressing suggestion effect is hardly displayed. . Thereby, when the number of holding balls is large, it is possible to easily skip the change of the first special symbol and to suppress the overflow of the entering ball by displaying the pressing suggestion effect. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is small, by not displaying the pressing suggestion effect, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not skipped, so the holding ball is digested and the time when the fluctuation display is not made is reduced. it can.

  In addition, the content of the pressing suggestion effect may be changed according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is large, an effect (for example, “press the switch !!”) is strongly displayed to strongly press the skip switch 51 c, and the holding ball in the first special symbol is displayed. If the number is small, an effect (for example, “Would you like to press a switch?”) May be displayed to weakly press the skip switch 51 c. This makes it easy to skip the variation of the first special symbol by displaying a pressing suggestion effect strongly urging the skip switch 51c to be pressed if the number of holding balls is large, thereby suppressing the overflow of the entering ball. it can. On the other hand, if the number of holding balls is small, the skip switch 51c is not pressed by not displaying the pressing suggestion effect strongly urging the pressing of the skip switch 51c, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not skipped. It is possible to suppress a problem that the user is quickly digested and the time during which the variable display is not performed increases.

  Furthermore, the above-described pressing suggestion effect may be displayed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. For example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, the pressing suggestion effect is displayed, and if the lottery result of the first special symbol is the big win, the pressing suggestion effect is not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to perform the pressing suggestion effect only during the change based on the deviation which can forcibly stop the lottery result of the first special symbol.

  In addition, the above-described opening pressing suggestion effect and closing suggestion effect may be executed on the basis of the prefetched result of the lottery result of the first special symbol. For example, when it is pre-read that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, it is easy to display a pressing suggestion effect that urges pressing of the skip switch 51c. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to skip out-of-range fluctuations, so it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. Note that the depression suggestion effect may be executed based on the pre-read result only in the case of a specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the third ball is a big hit among the holding balls of the first special symbol, the skip effect of the first ball and the second ball holding ball is a continuous aspect (continuous pressing suggestion The effect of the effect may be performed (displayed). Specifically, during the change based on the holding ball of the first ball, an effect accompanied by the characters "Find key!" Is displayed, and a pressing suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters "Acquire key!" Is displayed, and the variation based on the first holding ball is stopped. Next, during the movement based on the second holding ball, the effect accompanied by the text "Open treasure box with acquired key!" Is displayed, and at the same time a pressing suggestion effect prompting the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters "treasure box opened!" Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the second holding ball is stopped. After that, in the variation based on the holding ball of the third ball serving as the jackpot, an effect accompanied by the letters “Congratulations! Jackpot !!” is displayed.

  By performing (displaying) such continuous depression suggestion effects, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of becoming a big hit, so it is possible to improve the player's interest. In addition, since the fluctuation based on the holding ball serving as the big hit can not be forcibly stopped, the change based on the holding ball serving as the big hit may not indicate pressing of the skip switch 51c. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the mode of presentation based on entering the ball into the second winning opening 640 so as to suggest pressing of the skip switch 51c during fluctuation based on the holding ball serving as a big hit. It is also good.

<About control processing of display control device>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 50 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2801), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2901.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2902, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2903). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S2801 in FIG. 50) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 50) (S2905), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2801) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM 233 composed of a DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated rendition can be easily executed.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 51, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2902. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2903 to S2905 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2901. And after repeating the process of S2902 several times including the process of S2902, you may make it perform the process of S2903-S2905.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2903 to S2905 without performing the processes of S2901 and S2902. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, so the number of transfer processes of the program from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to more quickly start display control in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2803). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2803, then, the fluctuation image at power on is performed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2804, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S2805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 63A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed to transfer (see S4602 in FIG. 63A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52 (b)), it is simplified so that the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 18), which are power-on images, are drawn. The command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 52B) and the simple display setting process (see S3109 in FIG. 52B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the first winning opening 64, the right first winning opening 641 or the second winning opening 640 enters the ball (start winning), and the fluctuation effect is produced. If there is a start instruction from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, that is, if a display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image during power on (see FIG. 18) is displayed during the fluctuation effect period. Can be displayed immediately, and simple fluctuation effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2805, interrupt permission is set (S2806), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2806, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 52 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3001), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 52 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 22) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not the power-on image (see FIG. 18A), In order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S3102) is executed, and then display setting processing (S3103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S3102), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 to 59.

  In the display setting process (S3103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3102) etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S3104). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S3103) or the simple display setting processing (S3109) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S3105). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S3106). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S3104), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3105) The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S3107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eyes The stop type table corresponding to is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (refer to FIG. 18) on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S3108) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S3109) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 59, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3102) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 53, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3201), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S3201: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S3103) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S3202). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S3203).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3204: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. After that (S3205), the process returns to the process of S3201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S3301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the process of S3301 is turned on, and the other fluctuation is made. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3303). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3303. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3304), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S3305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3306), the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S3305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3302. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S3204 that there is no display variation pattern command (S3204: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3206), If there is a display variation type command (S3206: Yes), the stop type command processing is executed (S3207), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A to F, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command The symbol type is determined (S3401), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 52B) is executed, and the third symbol display device 81 Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the screen is set (S3402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S3403), and the processing of this type-of-stop command is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S3402 is described. In the above-described task processing (S3104), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3402 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3403 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S3402.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3206 that there is no display type command for suspension (S3206: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S3208). If it is determined in the process of S3208 that there is a jackpot related command (S3208: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S3209), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S3209) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S3209). This jackpot related command processing (S3209) is processing corresponding to various commands (opening command for display, number-of-round-display command, display ending command) for executing the jackpot effect received from the audio lamp control device 113. It is a process to execute.

  In the jackpot related command processing (S3209), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3501). If it is determined in the process of S3501 that there is an opening command for display (S3501: Yes), an opening command process (S3502) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3503.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (a). FIG. 56 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3601 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S3605), the opening command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3604, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the process of S3602 while extracting the drawing contents defined in the address shown by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is the character ROM 234 in advance As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, when the opening command processing is executed, an opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thus, while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to transfer image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is shown. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display number-of-rounds command has been received, there will be a lot of waiting between the end of the opening effect and the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will occur and the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped.

  In addition, since the ending command for display instructing the start of ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds) are finished, If image data required for ending effecting is transferred from character ROM 234 to video RAM 236 for ordinary use since the ending command for display is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effecting to the start of the ending effecting As a result, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the variation display of the jackpot is finished in the third symbol display device 81 It controls so that transfer of data required for round production and ending production ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are performed in the third symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds) The ending effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81 when it is finished, so that the player does not feel uneasy or uncomfortable feeling that the operation is not stopped. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there. It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed until the variation effect which becomes the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. As a result, when the third stage symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the opening effect, so the player does not know whether the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Referring back to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S350 that there is no display opening command (S3501: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3503), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S3503: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (b). FIG. 56 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing (S3504). The round number command process (S 3504) is to execute a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3705), and the round number command processing ends, and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S350 that there is no display round number command (S3503: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3505), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S3505: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S3506), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if there is no display ending command in the process of S3505 (S3505: No), the process of S3506 is skipped, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S3506). The ending command process (S3506) is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined number of rounds display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display data table buffer 233d. Is set (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S3801 is turned on, and The data table determination flag corresponding to the other ending display data table is set to off (S3803). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d corresponds to the display mode of which ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S 3803. Can be easily determined.

  Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3805). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3806), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S3208, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S3208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3210), and back image change If there is a command (S3210: Yes), a rear image change command process is executed (S3211), and the process returns to the process of S3201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 58A, details of the rear image change command processing (S3211) will be described. FIG. 58 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4603) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command is set to on (S3901). Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3902), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  The rear image change flag set here is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64). In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the back image change command process is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the current time is determined from the set back image discrimination flag The rear image type to be displayed in is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored The video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the rear surface image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more rear surface image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the previously received rear surface image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Referring back to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3210 that there is no rear surface image change command (S3210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect change command among the unprocessed commands (S3212). If there is an effect change command for (S3212: Yes), an effect change command process is executed (S3213), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, the details of the effect change command process (S3213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 (b) is a flowchart showing effect change command processing (S3213). The effect change command processing (S3213) is to execute processing corresponding to the display effect change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the effect change command processing, first, an effect change display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 4001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4002). Then, based on the effect change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S4005), the effect change command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3212 that there is no display effect change command (S3212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display press indication effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3214) If there are various indication suggestive effect commands (S3214: Yes), the suggestive effect command process is executed (S3215), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59 (a), details of the suggestion effect command processing (S3215) will be described. FIG. 59 (a) is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect command processing (S3215). The suggestion effect command processing (S3215) is to execute processing corresponding to the indication suggestion command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the suggestion effect command processing, first, a suggestion effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 4101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102). Then, based on the suggested effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S4105), the suggestion effect command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 53, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3214, when it is determined that there is no display suggestion effect command (S3214: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3216), and the error command is If there is (S3216: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3217), and the process returns to S3201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S3217) will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4201). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the type of error generated is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4202, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3216 that there is no error command (S3216: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3218), and the process returns to S3201.

  In the process of S3201 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes ), The processing of S3202 to S3218 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3202 to S3218 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S3201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S3108) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image (see FIG. 18), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 54 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 54 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. With regard to the command of, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  In addition, when the power is cut off during fluctuation of the special symbol and then restored, the special transmitted in S1610 of the startup process (refer to Figure 38) executed by the above-mentioned MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on. In the process of S2004 of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 by the voice lamp control device 113 receiving the effect permission command including that the symbol is changing, the display control device The display control device 114 receives the fluctuation start command (reception processing at S2117 of the command determination processing (FIG. 43, S2013)) of the power-on fluctuation image output to 114, thereby performing the simplified command determination processing (S3108). Start the fluctuation display in the simple display setting process (S3109) executed after that is received. Change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d of the image) is set. At the timing when the main control unit 110 outputs an instruction to start fluctuation of the power-on-time fluctuation image corresponding to the special symbol that was fluctuating at the time of power-off, the power-on fluctuation image is the power of the resident video RAM 235 Since it has been transferred to the insertion time fluctuation image area 235b, the start of the fluctuation display is immediately executed (display start) in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, power-on fluctuation images shown in FIGS. 18B to 18C are alternately displayed.

  It should be noted that after the presentation permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 38), it is executed based on the presentation permission command The main controller 110 transmits a stop command for stopping the variable display to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received by the simple command determination process (see FIG. 52B), and the power-on fluctuation image (FIG. 18B) in the display mode based on the received command. Or (c) stop).

  If the display control device 114 completes the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the power-on fluctuation image, only the power-on fluctuation image is received. Is displayed at the coordinate position for normal rendering of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 18A). Since the stop mode of the power-on fluctuation image is defined in the display stop command for stopping the power-on fluctuation image, the stop mode for the normal effect can not be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop mode may be determined and displayed in the display control device 114 based on the stop mode (big hit or removal) of the power-on fluctuation image. Thereby, even when the fluctuation of the power-on time change image is being executed, it is possible to switch to the normal effect from the time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest .

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 54A) executed in this case, in the processing of S3301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3302, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S3103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S4301: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S4302), S4303 to S4304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S4303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: YES), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4401).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4304), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S4303 (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4305.

  At S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S4501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is the End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S4503). If it is the demonstration display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S4505), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4506), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S4502: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S4309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S 4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 4311). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the decision display flag indicating that the decision display effect is on in the on state (S4314), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315) Return to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S3104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4315, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the finalized display flag is not on but off (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S4316). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S4316: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table It is set in the buffer 233 d (S 4317), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), a demonstration display flag indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set on (S4321), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S4316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S4316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S3109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 52B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simplified display setting process, the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect due to the power-on time fluctuation image ends A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display 18) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3105) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: YES), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4602) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S4601, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63B, the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 63 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4702). In the process of S4702, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4702 (S4702: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Also, as a result of the process of S4701, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

  In the process of S4703, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4703: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing of S4703, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is ended. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 52B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 52B) and the simple display setting process (see S3109 in FIG. 52B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 53 to 59) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64), subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 (FIG. 63 (a). See S4601: No)).

  The MPU 231 executes the resident image transfer setting process to remove the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image, and the power-on title image, which have already been transferred in the main process, to the resident video RAM 235. All resident target image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  The normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described next with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S3103) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S4802 (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of the image data is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

  In the process of S4806, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4806 (S4806: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to S4807. Also, as a result of the process of S4805, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4807.

  In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S4809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4809, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S4813, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4813 (S4813: Yes), the character ROM 234 does not need to transfer the image data to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, when the change of the back image is performed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the back image The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S3106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105) (S4901). That is, in the processing of S4901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3104), the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4902). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4902, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S4903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 52B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the game ball can not reach (or can not reach) the second winning opening 640 by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51, and the game ball has a firing intensity (0 to 90%) Is fired. On the other hand, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, the gaming ball is fired at a firing strength (100%) at which the gaming ball can reach the second winning opening 640. As a result, even if the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 51, the second winning opening 640 can not be won (winning is difficult), and the second winning opening 640 can be skipped by skipping The switch 51c can be used to facilitate winning by launching the gaming ball. Therefore, the operation of winning to the second winning opening 640 can be another operation, and the player can easily win the second winning opening 640 intentionally.

  Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible for the player to easily win the game ball in the second winning hole 640 intentionally. Therefore, in a specific gaming state (normal gaming state), based on the winning on the second winning opening 640, the benefits obtained (such as a jackpot bonus) are reduced. This makes it possible to suppress a problem in which the gaming shop side suffers a great deal of damage even when the game ball is made injustice so that the game ball is made to win only in the second winning opening 640.

  Furthermore, in the specific gaming state (normal gaming state), if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed while the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed for a predetermined number of times or more, an error display Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a warning sound or sound indicating an error is also output. Then, an error signal is also output to the external output terminal 261, and notified to the hall computer. As a result, the gaming shop can also determine the illegal gaming method at an early stage, and the damage due to the illegal gaming can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol even while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. And, while the first special symbol is fluctuating, when the result of the fluctuation indication of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a large or small hitting manner, the fluctuation indication of the first special symbol in fluctuation is forcibly stopped Ru. Therefore, since the game ball fired based on the depression of the skip switch 51c enters the second winning opening 640 for executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the player presses the skip switch 51c, (1) It is possible to forcibly stop the change display of the special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol during the variation when the result of the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a large and small winning manner during the variation of the first special symbol Although the display is configured to be forcibly stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display where the lottery result of the second special symbol is the big hit or the small hit is started during the change of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol in the change is forcibly stopped. You may Thus, the timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped can be advanced, and the player can be more strongly given the impression that the variable display has been skipped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a pressing suggestion effect (pressing suggestive effect at the time of opening or pressing suggestive effect at the time of closing) for prompting pressing of the skip switch 51c is executed (displayed) while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed. . Thus, the player can be urged to press the skip switch 51c, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped (skiped), so that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the depression suggestion effect, the state of the non-electric role thing 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 (that is, the state of whether or not the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 based on the depression of the skip switch 51c). Is configured to be different depending on the pressing effect to be executed (displayed). Specifically, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 based on the depression of the skip switch 51c (when the non-electric role object 640a is in the open state), the battle is performed based on the depression of the skip switch 51. An open-time pressing suggestion effect is performed (displayed) which suggests that the effect (see FIG. 7A) and the skip effect (see FIG. 6B) are displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640 based on the depression of the skip switch 51c (when the non-electric role object 640a is in the closed state), the game does not enter the second winning opening 640 The ball enters the rotating product 680 (that is, enters the operating port 670), and the non-motorized component 640a is operated to the open state, so the above-described opening depression is performed based on depression of the skip switch 51c. A closing depression suggestion effect that suggests that a suggestion effect is displayed is executed (displayed). Thereby, an appropriate effect is displayed according to the state of the non-electric role thing 640a (ie, the state of whether or not the gaming ball enters the second winning opening 640 based on the depression of the skip switch 51c). Can be displayed to the player without any sense of discomfort.

  In addition, the pressing suggestion effect is not limited to the one described above, and the content of the pressing suggestion effect may be changed according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is large, an effect (for example, “press the skip switch !!”) strongly urging pressing of the skip switch 51 c is displayed, and the first special symbol is held In the case where the number of balls is small, an effect weakly prompting the user to press the skip switch 51 c (for example, “Can I press the skip switch?”) May be displayed. This makes it easy to skip the variation of the first special symbol by displaying a pressing suggestion effect strongly urging the skip switch 51c to be pressed if the number of holding balls is large, thereby suppressing the overflow of the entering ball. it can. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is small, a pressing suggestion effect for weakly pressing the skip switch 51c is displayed, and a pressing suggestion effect for strongly pressing the skip switch 51c is not displayed, whereby the fluctuation of the first special symbol is skipped. Because it is not done, it is possible to digest the holding balls and reduce the time when the variable display is not displayed.

  In addition, the above-described opening pressing suggestion effect and closing suggestion effect may be executed on the basis of the prefetched result of the lottery result of the first special symbol. For example, when it is pre-read that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, it is easy to display a pressing suggestion effect that urges pressing of the skip switch 51c. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to skip out-of-range fluctuations, so it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. Note that the depression suggestion effect may be executed based on the pre-read result only in the case of a specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the third ball is a big hit among the holding balls of the first special symbol, the skip effect of the first ball and the second ball holding ball is a continuous aspect (continuous pressing suggestion The effect of the effect may be performed (displayed). Specifically, during the change based on the holding ball of the first ball, an effect accompanied by the characters "Find key!" Is displayed, and a pressing suggestion effect that prompts the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters "Acquire key!" Is displayed, and the variation based on the first holding ball is stopped. Next, during the movement based on the second holding ball, the effect accompanied by the text "Open treasure box with acquired key!" Is displayed, and at the same time a pressing suggestion effect prompting the user to press the skip switch 51c is displayed. Then, based on the depression of the skip switch 51c, an effect accompanied by the characters "treasure box opened!" Is displayed and the fluctuation based on the second holding ball is stopped. After that, in the variation based on the holding ball of the third ball serving as the jackpot, an effect accompanied by the letters “Congratulations! Jackpot !!” is displayed.

  By performing (displaying) such continuous depression suggestion effects, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of becoming a big hit, so it is possible to improve the player's interest. In addition, since the fluctuation based on the holding ball serving as the big hit can not be forcibly stopped, the change based on the holding ball serving as the big hit may not indicate pressing of the skip switch 51c. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the mode of presentation based on entering the ball into the second winning opening 640 so as to suggest pressing of the skip switch 51c during fluctuation based on the holding ball serving as a big hit. It is also good.

First Modified Example of First Embodiment
Next, a first modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed in the first modification.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 640 is provided at a position where the game ball fired when the skip switch 51 c is pressed can enter, and the second winning opening 640. An operation port 670 is provided on the right side of the game board for opening the non-motor-actuated part 640a attached to the opening state (that is, entering the second winning opening). On the other hand, in the first modified example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, the game ball fired when the skip switch 51c is pressed on the second winning opening 640 and the operation opening 670 is turned on. It differs in the point provided in the position which can be sphered. Further, in the present modification, since the gaming ball does not excessively enter the operation opening 670 in the right-handed gaming state, the rotating role thing 680 is not provided. Since the other points are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first modification, the skip switch 51c is pressed, and the game ball (see the broken line a in FIG. 2) fired with the firing intensity 100% can enter the second winning opening in the upper right area of the game area An operation port 670 is provided next to 640 and its left. Further, the second winning opening 640 is additionally provided with a non-motorized combination 640 a as in the first embodiment. When the non-electric role thing 640 a is in a closed state, the game ball shot by pressing the skip switch 51 c does not enter the second winning opening 640, and enters the operation opening 670.

  Based on the game ball entering the operation port 670, the non-electric role thing 640a is operated (variable) to the open state, and then the skip switch 51c is pressed and the gaming ball fired is the operation port 670. Without entering the ball, enter the second winning opening 640. Here, since the non-electric role thing 640a is opened by turning to the left, the gaming ball is unlikely to enter the operation opening 670 provided next to the left of the second winning opening 640. As a result, when the non-electric role thing 640a is operated (variable) to the open state, the skip switch 51c can be pressed to cause the gaming ball launched to enter the second winning opening 640 more reliably. it can. When a predetermined number of game balls (one ball in the first modification) enter the second winning opening 640, the non-electric role object 640a is opened (shown by a broken line in FIG. 66) to closed (shown by a solid line in FIG. 66). (Shown in Figure).

  As described above, in the first modification, even if the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state (the non-electric role object 640a is in the closed state), the first game played based on the depression of the skip switch 51c. When the ball enters the operation opening 670, the second winning opening 640 is opened (the non-electric role object 640a is opened), and then the second game ball launched based on the depression of the skip switch 51c is It is possible to enter the second winning opening 640.

  Thereby, even if the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state (non-electric role thing 640a is in the closed state), the game ball can be made to enter the second winning opening 640 based on the depression of the skip switch 51c. . As a result, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 at any timing of the player, and to skip the variation based on the first special symbol.

  Further, in the first modified example, in order to cause the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640, it is necessary to fire two game balls based on the depression of the skip switch 51c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from pressing the skip switch 51 c by mistake and skipping the fluctuation of the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the skip effect and the battle effect described above are not configured to be displayed when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, but when the game ball enters the operation opening 670. May be displayed. In addition, when the game ball enters the operation port 670, preparation for execution of the skip effect may be started. This is because, when the gaming ball enters the operation opening 670, the possibility that the gaming ball enters the second winning opening 640 is high thereafter. As a result, the processing load for executing the skip effect can be dispersed.

Second Modification of First Embodiment
Next, a second modification of the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed in the second modified example. The second modification is different from the above-described first modification in that the positions of the second winning opening 640 and the operation opening 670 are changed, and the other is the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second modification, an opening 604 is provided on the lower left side of the launch path 701, and a skip ball entering ball passage 606 through which game balls can flow is formed below the opening 604, and the skip ball entering ball is formed. At the downstream of the passage 606, a second winning port 640, a non-motor-operated part 640a and an operation port 670 are disposed. The skip ball entering ball passage 606 is a passage through which the game ball to be fired which is fired when the skip switch 51 c is pressed flows down, and the ball entering passage forming member 607 erected on the outer rail 62, the guide member 605 and the game board 13. The width direction is sectioned by and, and it is a passage where the front and rear surfaces are sectioned and formed by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16.

  The gaming balls having flowed down in the skip ball entering ball passage 606 enter an operation port 670 provided in the passage. By the game ball entering the operation opening 670, the non-electric accessory 640a is moved from the closed state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 67) to the open state (shown by a broken line in FIG. 67). As a result, the gaming ball to be fired next based on the depression of the skip switch 51 c flows down the skip ball entering ball passage 606 and enters the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, since the glass unit 16 forms the front surface of the skip ball entering ball passage 606, the inside of the passage can be visually confirmed. Further, by opening the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached, inspection in the passage can be easily performed.

  The opening 604 is formed between the outer rail 62 and the guide member 605 which constitute the outer peripheral side of the arc-shaped discharge path 701. The opening 604 is an outer peripheral side of an area (hereinafter referred to as a lower left chord area) in which the launch ball is fired upward to the left in the launch path 701, that is, the outer circumference of the launch path 701 when the gaming ball flows down by its own weight. It is provided at a position abutting on the side (hereinafter referred to as the lower left chord position). The reason why the opening 604 is provided at the lower left chord position in this way is that the game ball generated near the end of the firing path 701 can enter the opening 604 by its own weight. When the opening 604 is provided near the end of the launch path 701, that is, in the area where the launched game ball moves upward to the right (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord area), the game ball flows down by its own weight. The position where it abuts on the inner circumferential side (inner rail 61) of the firing path 701 (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord position). In the present embodiment, the release path 701 has a left arc shape so that the game ball is fired toward the upper left side, but even when the arc-shaped configuration other than the present embodiment is adopted, the game ball is By providing the opening 604 on the side that contacts with its own weight, it becomes possible to easily enter the game ball.

  Next, the configuration in the vicinity of the opening 604 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of a region LXVIII in the pachinko machine 10 described in FIG. On the guide member 605 side (right side in FIG. 68) of the opening 604, a guiding member 602 for guiding the game ball to the opening is provided. The guiding member 602 is formed of an elastic member (urethane), and its mounting base 602 a is screwed to the game board 13. Since the mounting base 602a is covered by the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605, the game balls do not collide. The guide member 602 is extended to approximately half the width of the launch path 701 to receive the game balls, and prevents the game balls from flowing down to the beginning of the launch path 701. Also, the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a rolls on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 and then contacts the guide member 602, but the tip of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 is the guide member Since the protection portion is formed so as to cover the mounting base 602 a of the 602, it is the tip of the guiding member 602 that the fired game ball contacts. The guiding member 602 is formed of an elastic member, and when it comes in contact with the game ball launched from the ball firing unit 112a, the leading end thereof elastically deforms in the direction of entering the game ball entering ball passage 606 (dotted line in FIG. (See FIG. 2) to cover a part of the opening 604. In this state, the guide member 602 faces the opening, and the opening width of the opening 604 is narrowed.

  Therefore, when the gaming ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a passes near the guiding member 602, the guiding member 602 is elastically deformed so that the firing force does not drop significantly. In addition, since the width of the opening 604 is narrowed by the elastic deformation of the guide member, it is possible to perform the discharge smoothly without falling into the opening. Then, after the fired game ball passes, the guiding member 602 elastically returns to its original position.

  Next, an explanation will be given when the guiding member 602 collides with the gaming ball. The guide member 602 is configured such that the tip end thereof protrudes toward the firing path 701 from a straight line connecting the inclined surface 605 a of the guide member 605 and the inclined surface start end of the outer rail 62. Further, the outer rail 62 and the opening 604 are formed such that an extension of the inclined surface of the outer rail 62 toward the opening 604 is directed into the opening 604. At a portion configured in this way, the gaming ball flowing down from the outer rail 62 side will intrude into the opening 604 by following any of the following paths.

  When entering into the opening 604 without contacting the induction member 602, the outflow velocity of the gaming ball is reduced by the projection 605a for preventing the movement port 670 or the second winning opening 640 from reaching the opening with no force Then, the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is reached. On the other hand, when entering the opening after coming into contact with the guiding member 602, the guiding member is elastically deformed in the direction of entering the firing path 701 by the external force received from the gaming ball. After the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is reduced by this elastic deformation, the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 is reached.

  Even if the guiding member 602 elastically deforms in the direction of entering the launch path 701 by the external force received from the gaming ball, the protective portion 605b of the guiding member 605 restricts the change of the guiding member 602, so The firing path 701 is not blocked by the received external force, and the guiding member 602 is only to the extent that the opening width of the opening 604 becomes wide (the gap between the guiding member 602 and the protective portion 605b in FIG. It only elastically deforms. Even in such a state of elastic deformation, the passage width of the launch path 701 immediately after passing the guide member 605 is such that two gaming balls pass so that the game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a can pass through the launch path 701. It has become possible width.

  By using such a configuration, it is possible to achieve both the function of receiving the game ball and guiding it to the skip ball entry ball passage 606 and the function of smoothly passing the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a. It becomes. Furthermore, since the elastic deformation of the guiding member 602 is limited by using the guiding member 605 which is a separate member from the guiding member 602, the guiding member 602 is moved in one direction (the direction of entering the skip ball entering ball passage 606). Can eliminate the need for using a complicated technique of making the material difficult to change in the other direction (the direction in which the emission path is blocked).

  The guiding member 602 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may have a configuration that guides the game ball to the opening without blocking the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a. For example, the mounting base 602a has a spring configuration that can rotate and return to the home position, and a variable configuration in which the plate-like member is pivotally supported by the mounting base 602a, or a configuration using a rotating body that can rotate only in the game ball shooting direction May be.

  Further, even if the configuration is not variable, any configuration may be used as long as the above function can be achieved. For example, by providing a guiding passage that gradually tapers along the firing direction of the launch ball, the gaming ball flows down to the ball launch unit 112a side. It is good also as composition which blocks doing. In the present embodiment, urethane is used as the elastic member, but any other material (such as silicone rubber) may be used as long as the material is excellent in impact resilience. Further, the attachment position of the guide member 602 may be on the inner rail 61 side.

  In the skip ball entering ball passage 606, a projection 605c integrally formed on the guide member 605, which will be described in detail later, is provided so as to cover the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the skip ball entering ball passage from vigorously colliding with the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 and being damaged.

Third Modified Example of First Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third modification will be described. FIG. 69 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The third modification is different from the above-described second modification in that the position of the opening 604 is changed, the guide member is removed, and the other is the same. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the third modification, the opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the launch path 701, and the game ball having flowed down the opening 604 is provided to the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 provided in the game area. It is configured to enter the ball. In addition, the skip ball entering ball passage 606 is configured to guide the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning hole 640 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13. In addition, the location where the skip ball entry ball passage 606 of the game board 13 is provided is made of highly transparent acrylic resin, and the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the back side of the game board 13 .

  Here, the flow of the gaming balls in the launch path 701 will be described. The game balls fired by the ball launch unit 112a are guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. That is, in the second modification, since the game ball is passing along the outer periphery of the firing path in the second modification, the firing path inner periphery side to which the launched game ball can not enter Is provided with an opening 604.

  As described above, in the third modified example, the opening 604 is not provided at the position where the launched game ball rolls, so the need for providing the guide member 605 is eliminated. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Here, the game ball fired when the skip switch 51c is not turned on (is not pressed) passes through the firing path 701 and is guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. On the other hand, when the skip switch 51c is on (pressed), the launched game ball does not reach the game area after passing through the launch path 701, and flows backward while flowing back the launch path 701. The gaming ball is guided to the opening 604 by the guiding member 602. The gaming ball having entered the opening 604 flows down the skip ball entering ball passage 606 and then flows down to the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 provided on the game board 13.

  It is limited by providing the structure (skip ball entry ball passage 606) for guiding the gaming ball to the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 as in the third modification, not on the front surface of the game board 13 but on the back surface. Since the front space of the game board 13, ie, the range of the game area, is expanded, it is easy to install a device for improving the interest of the game.

  In the third modification, the opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side in the launch path 701, and the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is provided in the game area of the game board 13, but provided at another place. May be For example, the opening 604 may be provided on the outer peripheral side in the launch path 701, and the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 may be provided in the lower right area of the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 71). By doing this, it is not necessary to provide the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 for causing the game ball to enter the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent an unfair act aiming at the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640.

  In addition, the shooting path 701 is configured such that the game ball can pass two balls in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a is one on the back side (game board 13 side) It may be configured to be able to fire while maintaining a distance through which the ball can pass. In this way, in the case where the game board 13 is provided with an opening, the passage width direction of the launch path 701 can be narrowed, so that the horizontal direction (width direction) of the game board 13 is effectively used. Is possible.

Fourth Modified Example of First Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth modified example will be described. FIG. 70 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The fourth modification is different from the above-described second modification in that the position of the opening 604 is changed, the guide member is removed, and the other is the same. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the third modified example, the opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701, and a foul ball flowing down the opening 604 is formed between the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. It passes through the opening 604 and enters into the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640.

  The flow of gaming balls in the launch path 701 will be described. The game balls fired by the ball launch unit 112a are guided along the outer rail 62 to the game area. That is, in the fourth modification, since the game ball is passing along the outer periphery of the firing path in the fourth modified example, the firing path inner periphery side to which the launched game ball can not enter Is provided with an opening 604.

  As described above, in the second modification, since the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the launched game ball rolls, there is no need to provide the guide member 605.

  Furthermore, the inner rail 61 is divided into the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b, and a gap that allows the game ball to pass one ball is defined by the lower end portion of the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. The gap between the upper end and the upper end forms the opening 604, and the game ball can enter the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 without using the guiding member 602. It becomes.

Fifth Modified Example of First Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The fifth modification is a further modification of the third modification described above, in which the position of the second opening 604, the position of the operation opening 670 or the position of the second winning opening 640 are changed, and a guide member 605 is added. It differs in points and is otherwise identical. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the fifth modification, the opening 604 is provided on the outer peripheral side in the firing path 701, and the game ball having flowed down the opening 604 is provided in the lower right area of the game board 13 or the second operation opening 670 It is configured to enter the winning opening 640. In addition, the skip ball entering ball passage 606 is configured to guide the game ball to the operation port 670 or the second winning hole 640 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 71). The game board 13 is made of highly transparent acrylic resin, and the player can view the game balls flowing down the back side of the game board 13. Further, since the passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board is provided from the left end to the right end of the game board 13, the path from the ball firing unit 112a to the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 It is possible to lengthen and prevent tampering with the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640.

  The flow of gaming balls in the launch path 701 will be described. The game balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a reach the guide member 605, and then the game balls rolled along the guide member 605 jump over the opening 604 and are led to the game area. That is, in the fifth modified example, the game ball launched is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the opening 604 and reaches the game area. The game ball fired upon depression of the skip switch 51 c reverses the firing path from the end side in the firing path 701 and passes through the opening 604 provided at the lower left chord position of the firing path 701.

  By providing the structure for guiding the gaming ball to the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 as in the fifth modification, not on the front surface of the game board 13 but on the back surface, a limited front space of the game board 13, That is, since the range of the game area is expanded, it is easy to install a device for improving the interest of the game.

  Also, by doing this, it is not necessary to provide the operation opening 670 or the second winning opening 640 for letting the ball enter the game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent an unfair act aiming at the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640.

<Sixth Modified Example of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth modification will be described. FIG. 72 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 removed. The sixth modification is a modification of the first embodiment described above, in that the positions of the rotating object 680 and the operation port 670 are changed, and on the front side of the rotating object 680 and the operation port 670 whose positions are changed. The difference is that the second front cover member 663 is provided and the pseudo out port 660, the pseudo rail member 661, the second front cover member 663, and the passage port 664 are provided, and the other points are the same. is there. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the sixth modified example, the operation port 670 is provided on the upper side of the out port 66, and the rotary part 680 is provided on the upper side of the operation port 670. As a result, both the gaming ball passing the left side of the variable display device 80 (so-called gaming ball hit left) and the gaming ball passing the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called gaming ball hit right) A game machine capable of entering the rotating role 680 (that is, capable of entering the operation port 670) can be provided.

  Further, in the sixth modification, a pseudo rail member 661 is provided on the upper part of the rotary product 680 to restrict the flow of the gaming ball downward. The pseudo rail member 661 is formed of resin in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is inclined to rise from the central portion to the left and right direction. As a result, the gaming ball whose downward flow is restricted by the pseudo rail member 661 is guided (flowing down) to the center of the pseudo rail member 661.

  Above the central portion of the pseudo rail member 661, a pseudo out port 660 is provided in which gaming balls guided (flowed down) to the center of the pseudo rail member 661 can enter. The shape of the pseudo out port 660 is the same as that of the out port of the first embodiment described above.

  Furthermore, a second front cover member 663 is provided in the lower region of the pseudo rail member 661 to make it difficult to visually check the inside. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game area in which the game ball can flow down is the upper range of the pseudo rail member 661. In addition, since the pseudo out port 660 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area in the range above the pseudo rail member 661, the pseudo out port 66 can be used for any of the winning ports 63, 64, 641, 640, 65. It can be made to recognize to the player that the game ball which has not won a prize is an out port to enter the ball.

  The gaming balls having entered the simulated out port 660 flow through a not-shown flow path provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 and flow down to a passing port 664 provided on the lower side of the simulated rail member 661. Since the passage opening 664 is provided on the upper side of the rotating object 680, it is possible for the gaming ball having passed the passage opening 664 to enter the rotating object 680.

  A channel forming member 662 is provided on the left and right of the rotating object 680, and the game does not enter the rotating object 680 among the gaming balls having passed through the passage opening 664 by the channel forming member 662 A flow path is formed where the ball flows down to the out port 66.

  Specifically, the left channel forming member 662 a is disposed on the left side of the rotating product 680, and the case member 682 which is the outer peripheral portion of the rotating component 680 and the left channel forming member 662 There is formed a flow path through which the game ball can flow from 664 to the out port. Among the gaming balls that have passed through the passage opening 664, this flow passage becomes a flow passage in which the gaming balls that flowed down to the left side of the rotating arrangement 680 flow down to the out opening 66 without entering the rotating arrangement 680 .

  The right channel forming member 662b is disposed on the right side of the rotating product 680, and the case member 682 which is the outer peripheral portion of the rotating product 680 and the right channel forming member 662b out the passage port 664. A flow path is formed in which gaming balls can flow down to the mouth. Among the gaming balls that have passed through the passage opening 664, this flow passage is a passage in which the gaming balls that flowed down to the right of the rotating arrangement 680 do not enter the rotating object 680 and flow down to the out opening 66. .

  As described above, in the sixth modification, the game ball passed on the left side of the variable display device 80 (so-called, game ball hit on the left) and the game ball passed on the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called on the right) It is possible for any of the game balls) to enter the rotating object 680 and to enter the operation port 670. Thereby, regardless of the gaming state (left-handed gaming state, right-handed gaming state), it is possible to enter the gaming ball into the operation port 670, that is, the non-electric role thing 640a can be opened.

  In addition, since the second front cover member 663 whose inside is difficult to visually recognize is provided on the front side of the rotating role product 680 and the operation port 670, the player can know that the game ball has entered the operation port 670 Is difficult (or impossible) to recognize. This makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize that the non-motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened or closed based on entering the ball into the operation opening 670. Can.

  In the sixth modified example, the rotating object 680 and the operation port 670 are provided on the upper part of the out port 66, and the game ball (the so-called, left-handed game ball) that has passed the left side of the variable display device 80 and the variable display The game ball that has passed the right side of the device 80 (so-called, right-handed game ball) is allowed to enter the rotating object 680 (that is, it is possible to enter the operation opening 670), It is not something that can be done. For example, the rotating object 680 and the operation port 670 may be provided in the upper part of the game board 13.

  Also, only the game ball passing the left side of the variable display device 80 (so-called, left-handed game ball) may be allowed to enter the rotating object 680 (that is, may be allowed to enter the operation opening 670). .

  Furthermore, the rotating role product 680 may not be provided. Thus, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the gaming area of the gaming board 13 can be widened. In this case, by providing the operation port 670 at the lower part of the gaming board 13 as in the sixth modification, the game ball excessively enters the operation port 670 and the game ball does not enter the other ball entrances. It is possible to suppress the problem with

  As mentioned above, although the some modification was shown, you may use another structure, without being restricted to these. For example, the inner rail 61 or the outer rail 62 constituting the firing path 701 may be provided integrally with a member constituting the actuation port 670 or the second winning port 640, or the actuation port 670 or the second A winning opening 640 may be provided.

  In addition, although the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 is provided as a pair, the present invention is not limited thereto, and only one of the operation port 670 or the second winning port 640 may be It may be provided in the game area).

  Furthermore, whether or not to enter the second winning opening 640 (opened / closed state) can be changed using the non-electric role thing 640a mechanically operated (variable) based on winning on the operating opening 670. The invention is not limited to this, and a motorized accessory that is electrically actuated (actuated by actuation of a solenoid or the like) may be used based on winning on the actuation port 670. In addition, this motorized combination may be closed based on the passage of a predetermined time. Furthermore, the opening and closing of the motorized prize may be variably controlled based on a predetermined lottery result (lottery result based on entering the ball into the operation port 670). As a result, the probability that the second winning opening will be in the open state can be changed based on entry to the operation opening 670, and variations of the game can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  Although the main controller 110 performs output processing based on various determination processes in each embodiment and modification described above, all the output information can be output from the audio lamp controller 113 or the external output terminal board 261. Even when the determination processing is performed by other than the main control unit 110, all information based on the determination result is output to the sound lamp control unit 113 or the external output terminal plate 261. It is configured as possible. The output information can be reported to the outside in a discriminable manner, and as means for reporting, various devices (LCD, speakers, etc.) connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the main control device 110 can be used directly. There is a display unit or the like connected.

  The present invention may be implemented on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  All or a part of each of the above embodiments and modifications may be combined and configured. Moreover, although it comprised by sub control apparatuses, such as the main control apparatus 110 and the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113, you may collect and constitute not only it but the main control apparatus 110 all the functions.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group: Skip function>
A first area where game balls can flow down, a second area different from the first area, where game balls can flow down, at least one of the first area and the second area And a launcher capable of launching the game ball based on the operation of the player, and a game ball by the launcher based on the operation of the player so that the game ball can reach the second area. A launch control means for controlling launch, a first ball entry means disposed in the first area, and a decision means for performing a decision based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and The display means on which the identification information indicating the judgment result by the judgment means is displayed, the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification information showing the specific judgment result When displayed on the display means, the player has The determination of the establishment of the specific condition based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means and the second ball entry means arranged in the second area, and the bonus giving means for giving the bonus that will be The predetermined period of time for the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the specific condition judgment means and the fact that the specific condition is judged to be satisfied by the specific condition judgment means A game machine A1 comprising: a stopping means for stopping before the lapse of time.

  Conventionally, a game board is provided with a starting opening, and when the game ball enters the starting opening, a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is variably displayed for a predetermined period for the corresponding symbols on the display device, thereby providing the player with game effects There have been proposed game machines in which the game is performed (e.g., JP-A-9-308730). However, since the next lottery result is not displayed until the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period and the lottery result is displayed, there is a problem that the efficiency of the game decreases. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the efficiency of gaming in order to eliminate such problems.

  According to the gaming machine A1, on the basis of the ball entering the first ball entering means, the game ball enters the second ball entering means with the dynamic display of identification information executed for a predetermined time by the dynamic display executing means When the specific condition is satisfied, the stopping means can stop the vehicle before the predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, since the dynamic display corresponding to entering the ball to the first ball entry means can be forcibly ended before the elapse of a predetermined time, many games can be performed in a short time, and the efficiency of the game is improved. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of

  In the gaming machine A1, the determination means executes the determination even when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the game ball is present in the second ball entry means as the specific condition. A game machine A2 characterized in that at least the condition is satisfied when the determination result by the determination means triggered by entering the ball is the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1, when the gaming ball enters the second ball entering means, the judgment is executed by the judging means, and the judgment result is a specific judgment result Since the specific condition at least holds true, even if the dynamic display corresponding to the first ball entry means is forcibly terminated, the specific judgment result can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

  In the gaming machine A2, the determination means gives the player a bonus by the bonus giving means rather than the specific determination result as one of the specific determination results when the game ball enters the second ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to determine a specific determination result in which a benefit is small, and the specific condition is at least satisfied when the benefit is a small determination result in which the benefit is small. A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2, at least the specific condition is satisfied when the specific small determination result of the benefit given to the player is determined by the determination means, so Even if the frequency for forcibly terminating the dynamic display corresponding to the means is set high, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the trouble that a great disadvantage occurs in the gaming shop side.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the restricted state for restricting the game ball from entering the second ball entry means, and the game ball being easier to enter the second ball entry means than the restricted state The variable member is changed from the non-restricted state to the restricted state based on the variable member capable of being changed to the non-regulated state, which is a state, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine A4 comprising: variable regulation means for varying the variable member from the restricted state to the non-regulated state based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the variable member enters the second ball entry means based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. In the second embodiment, it is possible to limit the ball entering into the second ball entering means, because

  The gaming machine A4 has a third entering means capable of entering the game ball disposed in the first area, and the predetermined condition is that the playing ball enters the third entering means Gaming machine A5 characterized by being established based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A4, by entering the third ball entry means, the variable member is varied such that the second ball entry means is in the non-regulatory state. Since the second ball entering means can be changed to the non-regulated state by having the player enter the third ball entering means intentionally, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  A game machine A6 characterized in that the game machine A5 has a suppressing means for suppressing the ball entering frequency of the game ball to the third ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A5, since the pitching frequency to the third ball entry means is suppressed by the suppressing means, the frequency at which the second ball entry means is varied to the non-regulated state There is an effect that it can be lowered and the ball can be restrained from entering the second ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine A6, the suppressing means is configured to be capable of guiding the gaming ball to the third ball entering means at a predetermined cycle.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A6, it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the third ball entry means at every predetermined cycle by the suppressing means. There is an effect that the gaming ball can be guided to the third ball entry means constantly.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the suppressing means includes a holding means having a holding portion capable of holding at least one game ball, and rotates the holding means to hold the game ball in the holding portion. A game machine A8 comprising: induction means for guiding to a third ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the suppressing means has a holding portion capable of holding one game ball, and is rotated and held to the third ball entering means Since the game balls that have been made to be induced are guided, there is an effect that the game balls can be periodically guided to the third ball entry means more reliably.

  In the gaming machine A8, the holding means is pivoted by the guiding means to thereby allow the holding portion to receive the game ball, and restrict the game ball from entering the holding portion. A game machine A9 characterized in that the position is variably changed.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the holding means can be changed to the allowable position where the holding portion can receive the game ball and the restricted position for restricting by holding the game ball Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the holding unit.

<Feature B group: hitting mechanism>
A ball-in means, which is disposed in a specific area in the game area and to which a predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering, an operation means that the player can operate, and its operation means A launcher capable of firing the game ball to the game area based on the operation and changing the firing intensity, and the operation means is such that the game ball launched by the launcher is sent to the specific area A first operation portion capable of causing the game ball to be launched by the launch means with a launch intensity difficult to reach, and a game sphere launched by the launch means different from the first operation portion reach the specific area A game machine B1 having at least a second operation portion capable of causing a game ball to be fired by the launch means with an easy launch intensity.

  Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs ballistic ball games by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle to adjust the firing intensity of the gaming ball to be launched to the game area (e.g., JP-A-9-308730). Gazette). In such a gaming machine, it is necessary for the player to adjust the operation amount of the operation handle in accordance with the gaming state (left-handed gaming state, right-handed gaming state), and the burden of the player's operation is large.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first operation portion capable of firing the game ball by the launching means with a firing intensity which is hard to reach a specific area in the gaming area, and the firing which makes it easy to reach a specific area in the gaming area And a second operation unit capable of firing the game ball by the launching means with strength. Therefore, the player may operate the second operation unit when the player wants to fire the game ball to a specific area, and may operate the first operation unit when he does not want to fire the game ball to the specific area. As a result, the burden on the player's operation can be reduced compared to a game machine in which the player adjusts the operation amount of the operation handle to adjust the firing of the game ball to the specific area. .

  The gaming machine B1 includes supply means for variably supplying power for firing the game ball to the firing means in response to the operation of the operation means, and the second operation unit is operated. A game machine B2 characterized in that electric power equal to or more than the maximum electric power supplied by operating the first operation unit is supplied by the supply means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the electric power more than the maximum electric power supplied from the supply means by operating the first operation unit based on the operation of the second operation unit Is provided, so that the firing intensity can be varied by a simple operation.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the first operation unit is configured to allow the player to rotate, the emission intensity is varied according to the amount of rotation, and the second operation unit is operated by the player. The game machine B3 is characterized in that the game ball is launched by the launching means at a specific launch intensity which is larger than the launch intensity of the maximum amount of pivoting based on being played.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, by operating the second operation unit, the first operation unit is fired at a greater firing intensity than when it is maximally pivoted. Since the game ball can be launched with a greater launch intensity with a simple operation, it is possible to change the launch intensity quickly and to make the player play various games.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched based on at least an operation by the first operation unit, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means Based on what has been determined, a determination means for performing the determination, a display means for displaying second identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the second identification information displayed by the display means for a predetermined period, Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, benefit providing means for providing a benefit to the player when the second identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, and And ending means for ending the effect being executed by the effect executing means before the predetermined period elapses when the specific condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball means. Have Game machine B4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exerted. That is, by operating the second operation unit, by causing the ball entering means to enter the ball, it is possible to end the dynamic display corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entering means before the elapse of a predetermined time. There is an effect that the dynamic display corresponding to the first entering means can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the determination means performs the determination even when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means in the display means. The first identification information indicating the determination result executed by the determination means is displayed when the ball is flashed, and the benefit providing means displays the first identification information indicating the specific determination result of the display means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by providing a smaller bonus than in the case where the specific determination result is indicated by the second identification information.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the first identification information indicates that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result when entering the ball entering means Since a smaller bonus is given than in the case of the above, even if the player can intentionally enter the second ball entry means intentionally by operating the second operation unit, the disadvantage of the game store side is There is an effect that it can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a restricted state for restricting the game ball from entering the ball entering means, and a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball than the restricted state. The variable member is changed from the non-restricted state to the restricted state based on the variable member being variable to the restricted state and the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the predetermined condition A gaming machine B6 comprising: regulation variable means for varying the variable member from the regulation state to the non-regulation state based on establishment;

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B5, the ball entering means can be changed from the non-restricted state to the restricted state by the variable member, so the game ball enters the ball entering means Is easily restricted.

  The gaming machine B6 has a third ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, and the predetermined condition is established based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means. A game machine B7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, so the player changes from the restricted state to the non-regulated state. There is an effect that it can be varied intentionally.

  A gaming machine B8 characterized in that the gaming machine B7 has suppression means for suppressing the pitching frequency of the gaming ball to the third ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B7, the frequency of entering the third ball entering means is suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the frequency at which the ball entering means is changed into the non-regulated state can be reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball entering into the second ball entering means.

  A gaming machine B9 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B8, the suppressing means is configured to be capable of guiding the gaming ball to the third ball entering means at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 8, it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the third ball entry means at every predetermined cycle by the suppression means, so while stably suppressing There is an effect that the gaming ball can be guided to the third ball entry means constantly.

  In the gaming machine B8 or B9, the suppressing means includes holding means having a holding portion capable of holding at least one game ball, and rotates the holding means to hold the gaming ball in the holding portion. A game machine B10 having a guiding means for guiding to a third ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8 or B9, the suppressing means has a holding portion capable of holding one gaming ball, and is rotated to be held to the third ball entering means Since the game balls that have been made to be induced are guided, there is an effect that the game balls can be periodically guided to the third ball entry means more reliably.

  In the gaming machine B10, the holding means is pivoted by the guiding means to thereby allow the holding portion to receive the game ball, and restrict the game ball from entering the holding portion. A game machine B11 characterized in that the position and the position are changed.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B10, the holding means is changed to the allowable position where the holding portion can receive the game ball and the restricted position for restricting by holding the game ball by being rotated by the guiding means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the holding unit.

<Feature C group: Intentionally winning>
A launcher capable of launching a game ball to a game area based on the operation of the player, and a game by the launcher based on the operation of the player so that the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area A launch control means for controlling the launch of a ball, a first ball entry means disposed in the specific area and to which a predetermined gaming value is awarded based on the game ball entering the ball, and an article placed in the specific area A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first state and the first ball entering means which are more easily guided to the first ball entering means than the second ball entering means A variable member which is varied to a second state in which the game ball can be easily guided to the second ball entering means, and a variable control means which varies the variable member from the second state to the first state; Re-variable control means for changing from the first state to the second state; Gaming machine C1, characterized in that to obtain.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a game characteristic of aiming at a predetermined location of a gaming area by adjusting the launch intensity of a launch device when a specific state (hit state) is reached. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 9-308730). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the game ball is fired at a place other than the predetermined place during the above-described specific state, an unintended winning will occur, which is disadvantageous for the player. There was a problem. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing such unintended winning.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in order to cause the first ball entry means disposed in the specific area to enter the ball, the game ball is allowed to enter the second ball entry means disposed in the specific area, which is variable It is necessary to change the member to the first state. As a result, even if the game ball is fired to a specific area where the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged based on the operation means being operated by the predetermined operation, the second ball entry is performed first. The game ball enters the ball means. As a result, even if the player unintentionally (incorrectly) operates the operation means by a predetermined operation, the game ball does not enter the first ball entering means, and an unintended winning is suppressed. be able to.

  The gaming machine C1 has selection means capable of causing the player to select and change the timing of changing the variable member from the first state to the second state by the re-variable control means. A game machine C2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the variable member is varied by selecting the timing at which it is varied from the first state to the second state by the selection means. There is an effect that it is possible to directly participate and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine C2, the selection means changes the variable member from the first state to the second state based on the predetermined number of game balls entering the first ball entering means. A game machine C3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C3, the player can change the variable member to the second state by firing the gaming ball by the operation of the player and causing the ball to enter the first ball entry means. By intentionally aiming the first ball entry means and firing the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entry means.

  In any one of game machines C1 to C3, the variable control means changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A game machine C4 characterized by being made to

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C3, there is an effect that it is possible to easily restrict the ball entering to the second ball entering means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the variable member is disposed at a position at which the game ball is restricted from entering the second ball entry means in the first state, and in the second state, A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is disposed at a position at which gaming balls are restricted from entering the first ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in the first state, ball entry to the second ball entry means is restricted by the variable member, and in the second state, ball entry into the first ball entry means is restricted, so the efficiency is improved. There is an effect that the ball entering rate to the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means can be limited well.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, movement of the identification information based on the third ball entering means disposed in an area different from the specific area, and the game ball entering the third ball entering means The specific condition is established by the dynamic display execution means which executes the dynamic display for a predetermined period, the determination means which determines establishment of the specific condition based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the determination means And a stop means for stopping the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the determination that it has been made before the elapse of the predetermined period. Machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the third ball entering means is determined if the determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied based on entering the ball into the first ball entering means. Since the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to entering the ball is forcibly stopped by the stopping means before the predetermined period has elapsed, the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the third ball entering means can be efficiently performed. It has the effect of

<Feature D group> (Skip notification)
The first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means for executing the judgment based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first judgment result by the judgment means Display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information displayed on the display means for a predetermined period, and the first for indicating the determination result specific to the display means When the identification information is displayed, a bonus giving means for giving a benefit to the player, a second entering means capable of entering the game ball, and a game entering the second entering means Variable member that can be changed to a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state and the first state or the first state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. A game ball enters the second ball entering means and a state variable means for changing to the second state. And stopping means for stopping the first identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means before the elapse of the predetermined period when the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable member is in the state A game machine D1 having effect execution means for performing different effects depending on whether the variable state is changed to the first state or the second state by the variable means. .

  Conventionally, a game board is provided with a starting opening, and when the game ball enters the starting opening, a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is variably displayed for a predetermined period for the corresponding symbols on the display device, thereby providing the player with game effects There have been proposed game machines in which the game is performed (e.g., JP-A-9-308730). However, in the above-described gaming machine, since the change period of the symbol is unilaterally selected and determined without the intention of the player, the efficiency of the game is degraded. However, if the efficiency is improved simply by configuring the fluctuation period short, the effects of the game become monotonous, and the interest of the game decreases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game while improving the efficiency of the game. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming efficiency and the interest of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the second entering means is caused to enter the ball, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the first identification information in the dynamic display is forcibly stopped by the stopping means before the predetermined period has elapsed. . The case where the variable member is changed to the first state where the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means and the case where the second ball entry means is changed to the second state where ball entry is difficult are different. Since the effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to produce an effect as to whether or not the player can stop the first identification information before the lapse of the predetermined period, thereby increasing the efficiency of the game. Also has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the gaming ball enters the second entering means, the specific condition is a condition in which the first identification information other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. A game machine D2 characterized by at least one.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the case where the first identification information in which the specific condition is other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed is one of the establishment conditions. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a failure that the dynamic display as the determination result is forcibly stopped before the predetermined period has elapsed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the variable member is changed to the first state by the state variable means, the effect executing means executes the first effect and is changed to the second state. The game machine D3 executes a second effect, and the second effect can be switched to a different effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by switching to an effect different from the second effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied, an effect different from the second effect can be executed There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the game machine D2 or D3, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, an acquisition means for acquiring information used for the determination of the determination means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means Storage means stored at least until the determination means determines it, and prior determination means for determining information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. A game machine D4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the prior determination means determines that the information used for the determination is determined by the determination means when entering the first ball entry means. Since the determination is made, it is possible to perform an effect or the like using the determination result before the dynamic display of the first identification information is started.

  In the gaming machine D4, the gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the presentation execution means executes at least the presentation when it is determined by the prior determination means that the first determination result is different from the specific first determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D4, the effect is executed by the effect executing means when it is determined by the advance determining means that the first determination result is different from the specific one. The effect is that the player determines whether or not the means can be entered into the means, and the player can prepare in advance to enter the second entering means. Further, since the determination result can be recognized in advance by the effect executed by the effect executing means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the effect execution unit is more than the newly acquired information based on the fact that the information newly acquired by the advance determination unit is determined to be the specific determination result. A game machine D6, characterized in that the effect is executed during dynamic display of the first identification information with respect to previously acquired information.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the information determined that the effect executed by the effect executing means is a specific determination result is started Since it is continuously executed until it is done, the sense of expectation given that a specific judgment result will be obtained can be enhanced by the effect executed by the effect execution means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature E group> (Skip production)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a judging means for executing a first judgment on the basis of the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a first judgment result by the judgment means And a dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the first identification information displayed on the display unit, and a dynamic display unit for a predetermined period of time by the dynamic display unit. Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode, and a bonus that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the display means And the second ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, and the determination means performs the second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. And the second determination results in the particular first determination result in the first determination. The second determination result is determined with a high probability, and the display means displays the second identification information indicating the second determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display means Is to dynamically display the second identification information, and the dynamic display mode determining means is for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information, and the specific first determination result In the case where the first identification information displayed as different determination results is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information as the second determination result is started. In the case where the dynamic display mode determining unit stops the dynamic display of the first identification information before the predetermined period elapses, and the dynamic display mode determining unit determines that the determination result is other than the specific second determination result As a dynamic display mode of the second identification information, Gaming machine E1, characterized in that is what determines the specific dynamic display mode for varying the effect of the dynamic display mode of the first identification information being displayed.

  Conventionally, a game board is provided with a starting opening, and when the game ball enters the starting opening, a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is variably displayed for a predetermined period for the corresponding symbols on the display device, thereby providing the player with game effects There have been proposed game machines in which the game is performed (e.g., JP-A-9-308730). However, in the above-described gaming machine, since the change period of the symbol is unilaterally selected and determined without the intention of the player, the efficiency of the game is degraded. However, if the efficiency is improved simply by configuring the fluctuation period short, the effects of the game become monotonous, and the interest of the game decreases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game while improving the efficiency of the game. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming efficiency and the interest of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the second entering means is caused to enter the ball, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the first identification information in the dynamic display is forcibly stopped by the stopping means before the lapse of the predetermined period. . Since the dynamic display mode of the first identification information is also variably displayed in the special dynamic display mode if the second entering means does not reach the second determination result, the dynamic display is performed. The dynamic display of the first identification information can have an expectation that is a specific first determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game while increasing the efficiency of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the special dynamic display mode includes a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. A game machine E2 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the special dynamic display mode is a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a dedicated dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. Since each of these is included, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player play an easy-to-understand game.

  In the game machine E1 or 2, the special dynamic display mode includes an effect indicating whether or not the benefit is provided by the benefit applying means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the special dynamic display mode includes an effect indicating whether or not the benefit is given by the benefit giving means, so that the privilege is given to the player There is an effect that it can be expected by the special dynamic display mode to be done.

  One of the gaming machines E1 to E3 has setting means capable of setting at least one of a special gaming state which is advantageous to the player and a normal gaming state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the special gaming state, The bonus granting means is configured to easily grant a bonus which is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific first determination result with respect to the specific second determination result when the normal gaming state is set. When the special game state is set, it is easy to give the player an advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state with respect to the specific second determination result. A game machine E4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the normal gaming state is set, the player is more than the specific first determination result with respect to the specific second determination result. It is easy to give an advantage which is not advantageous to the player, and it is easy to give an advantage which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state with respect to the specific second judgment result when the special game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game in the special game state can be improved. In addition, even in the case where the game ball is made to enter the second ball entering means only in the normal game state, it is possible to prevent disadvantageous benefits because it is configured to be easily provided with disadvantageous benefits.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the second identification information displayed as a determination result different from the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed, the stopping means may The dynamic display of the second identification information is stopped before the elapse of the predetermined period based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information as the determination result. Game machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the second identification information displayed as a determination result different from the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed, Since the dynamic display of the second identification information is stopped by the stopping means before the elapse of the predetermined period based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information which is the specific first determination result, the second There is an effect that dynamic display of identification information can be performed efficiently.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the dynamic display mode determining means comprises state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of gaming states different in the privilege to be obtained by the player, the dynamic display mode determining means comprising A game machine E6 characterized in that the corresponding special dynamic display mode is determined according to the gaming state set by the player.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means in accordance with the gaming state set by the state setting means. Therefore, it is possible to switch to the special dynamic display mode corresponding to the game state, and it is possible to realize diversification of the game.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a game characteristic that aims at a predetermined location of a gaming area by adjusting the launch intensity of a launch device when a specific state (hit state) is reached (for example, patent documents: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 9-308730).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the game ball is fired at a place other than the predetermined place during the above-described specific state, an unintended winning will occur, which is disadvantageous for the player. There was a problem.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing such unintended winning.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 has a launching means capable of launching the game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and the game ball can reach the specific area in the game area. In order to control the launch of the game ball by the launcher on the basis of the operation of the player, the predetermined game value is provided based on the game sphere being placed in the specific area. The first ball entering means to be provided, the second ball entering means arranged in the specific area and different from the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means to the first ball entering means From the second state, the variable member is changed to a first state in which the game ball is easily guided and a second state in which the game ball is more easily guided to the second ball entering means than the first ball entering means Variable control means for changing the variable member to the first state, and the first state And a, and re-variable control means for variably to the second state.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, firing means capable of firing the game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player and the game ball can reach the specific area in the game area, The launch control means for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch means based on the operation of the player, and the specific area where the predetermined game value is awarded based on the game sphere being entered 1 A ball entering means, a second ball entering means disposed in the specific area and different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball guided to the first ball entering means from the second ball entering means A variable member that is varied between a first state that is easy to do and a second state that makes it easier to guide the gaming ball to the second ball entering means than the first ball entering means, and the second state to the first state And variable control means for changing the variable member, and the first state to the second state And a, and re-variable control means for variably with.
As a result, in order to cause the first ball entry means disposed in the specific area to enter the ball, the variable member can be first received by causing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means disposed in the specific area. It is necessary to change to the state. Therefore, even if the game ball is fired to a specific area where the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged based on the operation means being operated by the predetermined operation, the second ball entry is first performed The game ball will enter the means. As a result, even if the player unintentionally (incorrectly) operates the operation means by a predetermined operation, the game ball does not enter the first ball entering means, and an unintended winning is suppressed. be able to.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (game area)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
112 Launch control device (launch control means)
640 second ball entrance (first ball entry means )
640a Non-motorized part (variable member)
670 Working port (2nd ball entry means )

Claims (1)

Launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player;
Release control means for controlling the firing of the game ball by the shooting means based on the operation of the player so that the game ball can reach a specific area in the game area;
First ball entering means disposed in the specific area and capable of entering game balls;
Second ball entering means disposed in the specific area and different from the first ball entering means;
Third ball entering means disposed in an area different from the specific area;
Dynamic display execution means capable of executing dynamic display of identification information for a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means;
A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed as specific identification information;
Determining means capable of determining establishment of a specific condition during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the game ball entering the first entering means;
The game ball easily enters the first ball entry means at a first position where the game ball easily enters the second ball entry means than the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means is easier than the second ball entering means A variable member that can be changed to a second position
When the variable member is varied to the first position, the variable member can be varied to the second position based on the first predetermined number of gaming balls being entered into the second ball entering means. First variable means for causing
When the variable member is changed to the second position, the variable member can be changed to the first position based on the second predetermined number of game balls having entered the first ball entry means. Second variable means for causing
Termination means for terminating the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means, before the elapse of the predetermined period; And have
When it is determined that the first ball entering means enters the first ball entry means during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the specific condition is satisfied, the period corresponds to the period until the specific condition is satisfied. all SANYO which specific effect is executed the indicating that the dynamic display of the identification information is terminated in the course of being,
The emission control means is configured to be able to change the emission intensity of the gaming ball in accordance with the amount of rotation of the first operation portion that can be operated by the player, and is different from the first operation portion. (2) It is characterized in that it is possible to fire the gaming ball with a firing strength capable of causing the gaming ball to reach the specific area based on the pressing operation of the operation unit. Gaming machine.

Images